Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual Product and Documentation Release 7.0 August 2012 Americas Headquarters Cisco Systems, Inc. 170 West Tasman Drive San Jose, CA 95134-1706 USA http://www.cisco.
THE SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION REGARDING THE PRODUCTS IN THIS MANUAL ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE. ALL STATEMENTS, INFORMATION, AND RECOMMENDATIONS IN THIS MANUAL ARE BELIEVED TO BE ACCURATE BUT ARE PRESENTED WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. USERS MUST TAKE FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR THEIR APPLICATION OF ANY PRODUCTS.
CONTENTS About this Manual xxxix Revision History xxxix Document Objectives Audience xli xli Document Organization xlii Related Documentation xliii Document Conventions xliv Obtaining Optical Networking Information l Where to Find Safety and Warning Information l Cisco Optical Networking Product Documentation CD-ROM Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request CHAPTER 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.1 Overview l l 1-1 1-2 1.2 Rack Installation 1-3 1.2.
Contents 1.5.5.2 MiniBNC Insertion and Removal Tool 1.5.6 SMB EIA 1-27 1.5.7 AMP Champ EIA 1-28 1.5.8 UBIC-V EIA 1-32 1.5.9 UBIC-H EIA 1-33 1.5.10 EIA Replacement 1-37 1.6 Coaxial Cable 1-26 1-37 1.7 DS-1 Cable 1-37 1.7.1 Twisted Pair Wire-Wrap Cables 1-37 1.7.2 Electrical Interface Adapters 1-38 1.8 UBIC-V Cables 1-39 1.9 UBIC-H Cables 1-44 1.10 Ethernet Cables 1-50 1.11 Cable Routing and Management 1-52 1.11.1 Fiber Management 1-53 1.11.2 Fiber Management Using the Tie-Down Bar 1-54 1.11.
Contents CHAPTER 2 Common Control Cards 2-1 2.1 Common Control Card Overview 2-1 2.1.1 Cards Summary 2-1 2.1.2 Card Compatibility 2-3 2.1.3 Cross-Connect Card Compatibility 2-3 2.2 TCC2 Card 2-6 2.2.1 TCC2 Card Functionality 2-7 2.2.2 TCC2 Card-Level Indicators 2-8 2.2.3 Network-Level Indicators 2-9 2.2.4 Power-Level Indicators 2-10 2.3 TCC2P Card 2-10 2.3.1 TCC2P Functionality 2-11 2.3.2 TCC2P Card-Level Indicators 2-13 2.3.3 Network-Level Indicators 2-13 2.3.4 Power-Level Indicators 2-14 2.
Contents CHAPTER 3 Electrical Cards 3-1 3.1 Electrical Card Overview 3-1 3.1.1 Card Summary 3-1 3.1.2 Card Compatibility 3-3 3.2 EC1-12 Card 3-4 3.2.1 EC1-12 Slots and Connectors 3-4 3.2.2 EC1-12 Faceplate and Block Diagram 3-4 3.2.3 EC1-12 Hosted by XCVT, XC10G, or XC-VXC-10G 3.2.4 EC1-12 Card-Level Indicators 3-5 3.2.5 EC1-12 Port-Level Indicators 3-6 3-5 3.3 DS1-14 and DS1N-14 Cards 3-6 3.3.1 DS1N-14 Features and Functions 3-6 3.3.2 DS1-14 and DS1N-14 Slot Compatibility 3-7 3.3.
Contents 3.8.3 DS3-12E and DS3N-12E Card-Level Indicators 3-23 3.8.4 DS3-12E and DS3N-12E Port-Level Indicators 3-24 3.9 DS3XM-6 Card 3-24 3.9.1 DS3XM-6 Slots and Connectors 3-24 3.9.2 DS3XM-6 Faceplate and Block Diagram 3-24 3.9.3 DS3XM-6 Hosted By XCVT, XC10G or XC-VXC-10G 3.9.4 DS3XM-6 Card-Level Indicators 3-25 3.9.5 DS3XM-6 Port-Level Indicators 3-26 3.10 DS3XM-12 Card 3-26 3.10.1 Backplane Configurations 3-26 3.10.2 Ported Mode 3-27 3.10.3 Portless Mode 3-27 3.10.4 Shelf Configurations 3-27 3.10.
Contents 4.7 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 Card 4-15 4.7.1 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 Card-Level Indicators 4-17 4.7.2 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 Port-Level Indicators 4-17 4.8 OC48 IR 1310 Card 4-17 4.8.1 OC48 IR 1310 Card-Level Indicators 4-18 4.8.2 OC48 IR 1310 Port-Level Indicators 4-19 4.9 OC48 LR 1550 Card 4-19 4.9.1 OC48 LR 1550 Card-Level Indicators 4-20 4.9.2 OC48 LR 1550 Port-Level Indicators 4-21 4.10 OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 Card 4-21 4.10.1 OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 Card-Level Indicators 4-22 4.10.
Contents 4.19 OC192SR1/STM64IO Short Reach and OC192/STM64 Any Reach Cards 4-46 4.19.1 OC192SR1/STM64IO Short Reach and OC192/STM64 Any Reach Card-Level Indicators 4.19.2 OC192SR1/STM64IO Short Reach and OC-192/STM-64 Any Reach Port-Level Indicators 4-49 4-49 4.20 Optical Card SFPs and XFPs 4-49 4.20.1 Compatibility by Card 4-49 4.20.2 SFP Description 4-50 4.20.3 XFP Description 4-51 4.20.4 PPM Provisioning 4-52 CHAPTER 5 Ethernet Cards 5-1 5.1 Ethernet Card Overview 5-1 5.1.1 Ethernet Cards 5-2 5.
Contents 5.7.1 5.7.2 5.7.3 5.7.4 STS-24c Restriction 5-17 G1K-4 Compatibility 5-18 G1K-4 Card-Level Indicators 5-18 G1K-4 Port-Level Indicators 5-18 5.8 ML100T-12 Card 5-19 5.8.1 ML100T-12 Card-Level Indicators 5-20 5.8.2 ML100T-12 Port-Level Indicators 5-21 5.8.3 Cross-Connect and Slot Compatibility 5-21 5.9 ML100X-8 Card 5-21 5.9.1 ML100X-8 Card-Level Indicators 5-23 5.9.2 ML100X-8 Port-Level Indicators 5-23 5.9.3 Cross-Connect and Slot Compatibility 5-23 5.10 ML1000-2 Card 5-23 5.10.
Contents 6.2.2.2 SW -LCAS 6-5 6.2.2.3 Distance Extension 6-5 6.2.2.4 Differential Delay Features 6-6 6.2.2.5 Interoperability Features 6-6 6.2.3 Link Integrity 6-6 6.2.4 Link Recovery 6-7 6.3 FC_MR-4 Card Application 6.4 FC_MR-4 Card GBICs CHAPTER 7 Card Protection 6-7 6-8 7-1 7.1 Electrical Card Protection 7-1 7.1.1 1:1 Protection 7-2 7.1.2 1:N Protection 7-2 7.1.2.1 Revertive Switching 7-4 7.1.2.2 1:N Protection Guidelines 7-4 7.2 Electrical Card Protection and the Backplane 7.2.
Contents 8.5.1.2 Node View Card Shortcuts 8.5.1.3 Node View Tabs 8-10 8.5.2 Network View 8-11 8.5.2.1 Network View Tabs 8-12 8.5.2.2 CTC Node Colors 8-13 8.5.2.3 DCC Links 8-13 8.5.2.4 Link Consolidation 8-13 8.5.3 Card View 8-14 8.5.4 Print or Export CTC Data 8-16 8.6 TCC2/TCC2P Card Reset 8-17 8.7 TCC2/TCC2P Card Database 8.8 Software Revert CHAPTER Security 9 8-10 8-17 8-18 9-1 9.1 User IDs and Security Levels 9-1 9.2 User Privileges and Policies 9-1 9.2.
Contents 11.2.3 Circuit States 11-7 11.2.4 Circuit Protection Types 11-9 11.2.5 Circuit Information in the Edit Circuit Window 11.3 Cross-Connect Card Bandwidth 11.4 Portless Transmux 11-12 11-15 11.5 DCC Tunnels 11-16 11.5.1 Traditional DCC Tunnels 11.5.2 IP-Encapsulated Tunnels 11.6 SDH Tunneling 11-17 11-18 11-18 11.7 Multiple Destinations for Unidirectional Circuits 11.8 Monitor Circuits 11-10 11-18 11-19 11.9 Path Protection Circuits 11-19 11.9.1 Open-Ended Path Protection Circuits 11-20 11.
Contents 11.21 VLAN Management 11.22 Server Trails CHAPTER 12 11-44 11-44 SONET Topologies and Upgrades 12-1 12.1 SONET Rings and TCC2/TCC2P Cards 12-1 12.2 Bidirectional Line Switched Rings 12-2 12.2.1 Two-Fiber BLSRs 12-2 12.2.2 Four-Fiber BLSRs 12-5 12.2.3 BLSR Bandwidth 12-8 12.2.4 BLSR Application Example 12-9 12.2.5 BLSR Fiber Connections 12-12 12.3 Dual-Ring Interconnect 12-13 12.3.1 BLSR DRI 12-14 12.4 Comparison of the Protection Schemes 12.5 Linear ADM Configurations 12-18 12-19 12.
Contents 13.2.9 IP Scenario 9: IP Addressing with Secure Mode Enabled 13.3 Provisionable Patchcords 13.4 Routing Table 13-22 13-24 13.5 External Firewalls 13.6 Open GNE 13-20 13-25 13-27 13.7 TCP/IP and OSI Networking 13-29 13.7.1 Point-to-Point Protocol 13-30 13.7.2 Link Access Protocol on the D Channel 13-31 13.7.3 OSI Connectionless Network Service 13-31 13.7.4 OSI Routing 13-34 13.7.4.1 End System-to-Intermediate System Protocol 13-36 13.7.4.
Contents 14.2 LCD Alarm Counts 14-1 14.3 Alarm Information 14-2 14.3.1 Viewing Alarms With Each Node’s Time Zone 14-4 14.3.2 Controlling Alarm Display 14-4 14.3.3 Filtering Alarms 14-4 14.3.4 Viewing Alarm-Affected Circuits 14-5 14.3.5 Conditions Tab 14-5 14.3.6 Controlling the Conditions Display 14-6 14.3.6.1 Retrieving and Displaying Conditions 14-6 14.3.6.2 Conditions Column Descriptions 14-6 14.3.6.3 Filtering Conditions 14-7 14.3.7 Viewing History 14-7 14.3.7.1 History Column Descriptions 14-8 14.3.
Contents 15.5.3 DS1-14 and DS1N-14 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters 15-16 15.5.3.1 DS-1 Facility Data Link Performance Monitoring 15-18 15.5.4 DS3-12 and DS3N-12 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters 15-18 15.5.5 DS3-12E and DS3N-12E Card Performance Monitoring Parameters 15-19 15.5.6 DS3i-N-12 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters 15-21 15.5.7 DS3XM-6 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters 15-23 15.5.8 DS3XM-12 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters 15-25 15.5.
Contents 16.5 SNMP Message Types 16-4 16.6 SNMP Management Information Bases 16-5 16.6.1 IETF-Standard MIBs for the ONS 15454 16-5 16.6.2 Proprietary ONS 15454 MIBs 16-6 16.6.3 Generic Threshold and Performance Monitoring MIBs 16-7 16.7 SNMP Trap Content 16-8 16.7.1 Generic and IETF Traps 16-9 16.7.2 Variable Trap Bindings 16-10 16.8 SNMP Community Names 16.9 Proxy Over Firewalls 16-16 16-16 16.10 Remote Monitoring 16-16 16.10.1 64-Bit RMON Monitoring over DCC 16-17 16.10.1.
Contents A.1.2 Configurations A-1 A.1.3 Cisco Transport Controller A-2 A.1.4 External LAN Interface A-2 A.1.5 TL1 Craft Interface A-2 A.1.6 Modem Interface A-2 A.1.7 Alarm Interface A-2 A.1.8 EIA Interface A-3 A.1.9 BITS Interface A-3 A.1.10 System Timing A-3 A.1.11 System Power A-3 A.1.12 System Environmental Specifications A.1.13 Dimensions A-4 A.2 SFP, XFP, and GBIC Specifications A.3 General Card Specifications A.3.1 Power A-6 A.3.2 Temperature A-8 A-3 A-4 A-6 A.
Contents A.6.4 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 Card Specifications A-28 A.6.5 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 Card Specifications A-29 A.6.6 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 Specifications A-30 A.6.7 OC48 IR 1310 Card Specifications A-31 A.6.8 OC48 LR 1550 Card Specifications A-32 A.6.9 OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 Card Specifications A-33 A.6.10 OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 Card Specifications A-33 A.6.11 OC48 ELR/STM 16 EH 100 GHz Card Specifications A-34 A.6.12 OC48 ELR 200 GHz Card Specifications A-35 A.6.
Contents C.2 Card Default Settings C-2 C.2.1 Configuration Defaults C-2 C.2.2 Threshold Defaults C-3 C.2.3 Defaults by Card C-4 C.2.3.1 DS-1 Card Default Settings C-4 C.2.3.2 DS1/E1-56 Card Default Settings C-7 C.2.3.3 DS-3 Card Default Settings C-13 C.2.3.4 DS3/EC1-48 Card Default Settings C-14 C.2.3.5 DS3E Card Default Settings C-18 C.2.3.6 DS3I Card Default Settings C-20 C.2.3.7 DS3XM-6 Card Default Settings C-22 C.2.3.8 DS3XM-12 Card Default Settings C-25 C.2.3.9 EC1-12 Card Default Settings C-29 C.2.
Contents Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.
F I G U R E S Figure 1-1 Cisco ONS 15454 ANSI Dimensions Figure 1-2 Mounting an ONS 15454 in a Rack Figure 1-3 The ONS 15454 Front Door Figure 1-4 Cisco ONS 15454 Deep Door Figure 1-5 ONS 15454 Front Door Ground Strap 1-8 Figure 1-6 Removing the ONS 15454 Front Door 1-9 Figure 1-7 Front-Door Erasable Label Figure 1-8 Laser Warning on the Front-Door Label Figure 1-9 Backplane Covers Figure 1-10 Removing the Lower Backplane Cover Figure 1-11 Backplane Attachment for Cover Figure 1-12
Figures Figure 1-31 Crossover Cable Figure 1-32 Managing Cables on the Front Panel Figure 1-33 Fiber Capacity 1-53 Figure 1-34 Tie-Down Bar 1-54 Figure 1-35 AEP Printed Circuit Board Assembly Figure 1-36 AEP Block Diagram Figure 1-37 AEP Wire-Wrap Connections to Backplane Pins Figure 1-38 Alarm Input Circuit Diagram Figure 1-39 Alarm Output Circuit Diagram Figure 1-40 Detectable Filler Card Faceplate Figure 1-41 Ground Posts on the ONS 15454 Backplane Figure 1-42 ONS 15454 Backplan
Figures Figure 3-12 DS3XM-12 Faceplate and Block Diagram Figure 4-1 OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 Faceplate and Block Diagram 4-6 Figure 4-2 OC3IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 Faceplate and Block Diagram 4-8 Figure 4-3 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 Faceplate and Block Diagram 4-10 Figure 4-4 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 Faceplate and Block Diagram 4-12 Figure 4-5 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 Faceplate and Block Diagram 4-14 Figure 4-6 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 Faceplate and Block Diagram Figure 4-7 OC48 IR 1310 Faceplate and Block Diag
Figures Figure 5-8 ML100X-8 Faceplate and Block Diagram Figure 5-9 ML1000-2 Faceplate Figure 5-10 CE-100T-8 Faceplate and Block Diagram 5-26 Figure 5-11 CE-1000-4 Faceplate and Block Diagram 5-30 Figure 5-12 GBICs with Clips (left) and with a Handle (right) Figure 5-13 CWDM GBIC with Wavelength Appropriate for Fiber-Connected Device Figure 5-14 G-Series with CWDM/DWDM GBICs in Cable Network Figure 5-15 Mylar Tab SFP Figure 5-16 Actuator/Button SFP Figure 5-17 Bail Clasp SFP Figure 6-1
Figures Figure 11-9 Secondary Sources and Destinations Figure 11-10 Alternate Paths for Virtual Path Protection Segments Figure 11-11 Mixing 1+1 or BLSR Protected Links With a Path Protection Figure 11-12 Ethernet Shared Packet Ring Routing Figure 11-13 Ethernet and Path Protection 11-30 Figure 11-14 VCAT Common Fiber Routing 11-34 Figure 11-15 VCAT Split Fiber Routing Figure 11-16 Rolls Window Figure 11-17 Single Source Roll Figure 11-18 Single Destination Roll Figure 11-19 Single R
Figures Figure 13-1 IP Scenario 1: CTC and ONS 15454s on Same Subnet Figure 13-2 IP Scenario 2: CTC and ONS 15454 Nodes Connected to a Router Figure 13-3 IP Scenario 3: Using Proxy ARP Figure 13-4 IP Scenario 3: Using Proxy ARP with Static Routing 13-6 Figure 13-5 IP Scenario 4: Default Gateway on a CTC Computer 13-7 Figure 13-6 IP Scenario 5: Static Route With One CTC Computer Used as a Destination Figure 13-7 IP Scenario 5: Static Route With Multiple LAN Destinations Figure 13-8 IP Scena
Figures Figure 13-36 OSI/IP Scenario 5: GNE Without an OSI DCC Connection Figure 13-37 OSI/IP Scenario 6: IP OSS, OSI DCN, ONS GNE, OSI DCC, and Other Vendor ENE Figure 13-38 OSI/IP Scenario 7: OSI OSS, OSI DCN, Other Vender GNE, OSI DCC, and ONS NEs 13-58 Figure 13-39 OSI/IP Scenario 8: OSI OSS, OSI DCN, ONS GNE, OSI DCC, and Other Vender NEs 13-60 Figure 14-1 Shelf LCD Panel Figure 14-2 Select Affected Circuits Option Figure 14-3 Network View Alarm Profiles Window Figure 14-4 DS1 Card Al
Figures Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.
T A B L E S Table 1 Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual Chapters Table 1-1 EIA Types Compatible with the 15454-SA-ANSI Only Table 1-2 EIA Configurations Compatible with the 15454-SA-ANSI and the 15454-SA-HD Table 1-3 MiniBNC Protection Types and Slots Table 1-4 J-Labelling Port Assignments for a Shelf Assembly Configure with Low-Density Electrical Cards (A Side) Table 1-5 J-Labelling Port Assignments for a Shelf Assembly Configured with Low-Density Electrical Cards (B Side) 1-24 Table 1-6 J-Label
Tables Table 1-28 BITS External Timing Pin Assignments Table 1-29 LAN Pin Assignments Table 1-30 Craft Interface Pin Assignments Table 1-31 Slot and Card Symbols Table 1-32 Card Ports, Line Rates, and Connectors Table 1-33 ONS 15454 Software and Hardware Compatibility—XC and XCVT Configurations Table 1-34 ONS 15454 Software and Hardware Compatibility—XC10G and XC-VXC-10G Configurations Table 2-1 Common Control Card Functions Table 2-2 Common-Control Card Software Release Compatibility Tab
Tables Table 3-6 DS1/E1-56 Card-Level Indicators Table 3-7 DS3-12 and DS3N-12 Card-Level Indicators Table 3-8 DS3/EC1-48 Slot Restrictions Table 3-9 DS3/EC1-48 Card-Level Indicators Table 3-10 DS3i-N-12 Card-Level Indicators Table 3-11 DS3-12E and DS3N-12E Card-Level Indicators Table 3-12 DS3XM-6 Card-Level Indicators 3-26 Table 3-13 DS3XM-12 Shelf Configurations 3-27 Table 3-14 DS3XM-12 Features Table 3-15 DS3XM-12 Card-Level Indicators 3-31 Table 4-1 Optical Cards for the ONS 1545
Tables Table 5-3 E100T-12 Card-Level Indicators 5-5 Table 5-4 E100T-12 Port-Level Indicators 5-5 Table 5-5 E100T-G Card-Level Indicators 5-7 Table 5-6 E100T-G Port-Level Indicators 5-8 Table 5-7 E1000-2 Card-Level Indicators 5-10 Table 5-8 E1000-2 Port-Level Indicators 5-10 Table 5-9 E1000-2-G Card-Level Indicators 5-13 Table 5-10 E1000-2-G Port-Level Indicators 5-13 Table 5-11 G1000-4 Card-Level Indicators 5-15 Table 5-12 G1000-4 Port-Level Indicators 5-16 Table 5-13 G1K-4 C
Tables Table 8-6 Node View Card Port Colors and Service States Table 8-7 Node View Tabs and Subtabs Table 8-8 Network View Tabs and Subtabs Table 8-9 Node Status Shown in Network View Table 8-10 DCC Colors Indicating State in Network View Table 8-11 Link Icons Table 8-12 Card View Tabs and Subtabs Table 9-1 ONS 15454 Security Levels—Node View Table 9-2 ONS 15454 Security Levels—Network View Table 9-3 ONS 15454 Default User Idle Times Table 9-4 Audit Trail Window Columns Table 9-5 Sha
Tables Table 12-4 Comparison of the Protection Schemes Table 12-5 Slot 5, 6, 12, and 13 Upgrade Options Table 12-6 Upgrade Options for Slots 1 through 4 and 14 through 17 Table 13-1 General ONS 15454 IP Troubleshooting Checklist Table 13-2 ONS 15454 Gateway and End NE Settings Table 13-3 SOCKS Proxy Server Firewall Filtering Rules Table 13-4 SOCKS Proxy Server Firewall Filtering Rules When Packet Addressed to the ONS 15454 Table 13-5 Cisco ONS 15454 Client/Trunk Card Combinations for Provisi
Tables Table 15-6 DS1-14 and DS1N-14 Card PMs 15-17 Table 15-7 DS3-12 and DS3N-12 Card PMs 15-19 Table 15-8 DS3-12E and DS3N-12E Card PMs Table 15-9 DS3i-N-12 Card PMs Table 15-10 DS3XM-6 Card PMs Table 15-11 DS3XM-12 Card PMs Table 15-12 DS3/EC1-48 Card PMs Table 15-13 E-Series Ethernet Statistics Parameters Table 15-14 maxBaseRate for STS Circuits Table 15-15 Ethernet History Statistics per Time Interval Table 15-16 G-Series Ethernet Statistics Parameters Table 15-17 ML-Series Et
Tables Table A-2 Individual Card Power Requirements Table A-3 Card Temperature Ranges and Product Names Table B-1 ONS 15454 Service State Primary States and Primary State Qualifiers Table B-2 ONS 15454 Secondary States Table B-3 ONS 15454 Administrative States Table B-4 ONS 15454 Card Service State Transitions Table B-5 ONS 15454 Port and Cross-Connect Service State Transitions Table C-1 DS-1 Card Default Settings Table C-2 DS1/E1-56 Card Default Settings Table C-3 DS-3 Card Default Sett
About this Manual Note The terms "Unidirectional Path Switched Ring" and "UPSR" may appear in Cisco literature. These terms do not refer to using Cisco ONS 15xxx products in a unidirectional path switched ring configuration. Rather, these terms, as well as "Path Protected Mesh Network" and "PPMN," refer generally to Cisco's path protection feature, which may be used in any topological network configuration.
About this Manual Date Notes April 2008 Added a note in the User Password, Login, and Access Policies section in the Security chapter. Updated note on protection switching in Link Capacity Adjustment section in Circuits and Tunnels chapter. May 2008 Updated the table, Software and Hardware Compatibility—XC10G and XC-VXC-10G Configurations in the Shelf and Backplane Hardware chapter. Added power-level LED information for TCC2 and TCC2P cards in Common Control Cards chapter.
About this Manual Date August 2009 November 2009 Notes • Updated the first footnote in the table titled ONS 15454 Software and Hardware Compatibility—XC10G and XC-VXC-10G Configurations in the chapter, Shelf and Backplane Hardware. • Added a caution in section DS3XM-12 Card of Chapter 3, Electrical Cards. • Added a new section, SDH Tunneling in the chapter, Circuits and Tunnels.
About this Manual Document Organization Table 1 Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual Chapters Title Summary Chapter 1, “Shelf and Backplane Hardware” Includes descriptions of the rack, backplane, backplane pins, ferrites, power and ground, fan-tray assembly, air filter, card slots, cables, cable connectors, and cable routing. Chapter 2, “Common Control Cards” Includes descriptions of the TCC2, TCC2P, XCVT, XC-VXC-10G, XC10G, and AIC-I cards.
About this Manual Table 1 Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual Chapters (continued) Title Summary Chapter 13, “Management Network Connectivity” Includes IP addressing scenarios and information about IP networking with the ONS 15454, as well as information about provisionable patchcords, the routing table, external firewalls, and open gateway network element (GNE) networks.
About this Manual Document Conventions This publication uses the following conventions: Convention Application boldface Commands and keywords in body text. italic Command input that is supplied by the user. [ Keywords or arguments that appear within square brackets are optional. ] {x|x|x} A choice of keywords (represented by x) appears in braces separated by vertical bars. The user must select one. Ctrl The control key.
About this Manual Warning IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS This warning symbol means danger. You are in a situation that could cause bodily injury. Before you work on any equipment, be aware of the hazards involved with electrical circuitry and be familiar with standard practices for preventing accidents. Use the statement number provided at the end of each warning to locate its translation in the translated safety warnings that accompanied this device.
About this Manual Avvertenza IMPORTANTI ISTRUZIONI SULLA SICUREZZA Questo simbolo di avvertenza indica un pericolo. La situazione potrebbe causare infortuni alle persone. Prima di intervenire su qualsiasi apparecchiatura, occorre essere al corrente dei pericoli relativi ai circuiti elettrici e conoscere le procedure standard per la prevenzione di incidenti.
About this Manual Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.
About this Manual Aviso INSTRUÇÕES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURANÇA Este símbolo de aviso significa perigo. Você se encontra em uma situação em que há risco de lesões corporais. Antes de trabalhar com qualquer equipamento, esteja ciente dos riscos que envolvem os circuitos elétricos e familiarize-se com as práticas padrão de prevenção de acidentes. Use o número da declaração fornecido ao final de cada aviso para localizar sua tradução nos avisos de segurança traduzidos que acompanham o dispositivo.
About this Manual Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.
About this Manual Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request Obtaining Optical Networking Information This section contains information that is specific to optical networking products. For information that pertains to all of Cisco, refer to the Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request section.
CH A P T E R 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware Note The terms "Unidirectional Path Switched Ring" and "UPSR" may appear in Cisco literature. These terms do not refer to using Cisco ONS 15xxx products in a unidirectional path switched ring configuration. Rather, these terms, as well as "Path Protected Mesh Network" and "PPMN," refer generally to Cisco's path protection feature, which may be used in any topological network configuration.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.1 1.1 Overview Caution Unused card slots should be filled with a detectable filler card (Cisco P/N 15454-FILLER) or a non-detectable filler card (Cisco P/N 15454-BLANK). The filler card ensures proper airflow when operating the ONS 15454 without the front door attached, although Cisco recommends that the front door remain attached. Note The ONS 15454 is designed to comply with Telcordia GR-1089-CORE Type 2 and Type 4.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.2 1.2 Rack Installation • United States: National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70; United States National Electrical Code • Canada: Canadian Electrical Code, Part I, CSA C22.1 • Other countries: If local and national electrical codes are not available refer to IEC 364, Part 1 through Part 7 1.2 Rack Installation The ONS 15454 is mounted in a 19- or 23-in. (482.6- or 584.2-mm) equipment rack.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.2 1.2.1 Reversible Mounting Bracket Figure 1-1 Cisco ONS 15454 ANSI Dimensions Top View 22 in. (55.88 cm) total width 12 in. (30.48 cm) 19 in. (48.26 cm) or 23 in. (58.42 cm) between mounting screw holes Side View 5 in.(12.7 cm) Front View 22 in. (55.88 cm) total width 32099 18.5 in. (46.99 cm) 12 in. (30.48 cm) 19 in. (48.26 cm) or 23 in. (58.42 cm) between mounting screw holes 1.2.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.2 1.2.2 Mounting a Single Node 1.2.2 Mounting a Single Node Mounting the ONS 15454 in a rack requires a minimum of 18.5 inches (469.9 mm) of vertical rack space and one additional inch (25.4 mm) for air flow. To ensure the mounting is secure, use two to four #12-24 mounting screws for each side of the shelf assembly. Figure 1-2 shows the rack mounting position for the ONS 15454.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.3 1.2.4 ONS 15454 Bay Assembly 1.2.4 ONS 15454 Bay Assembly The Cisco ONS 15454 Bay Assembly simplifies ordering and installing the ONS 15454 because it allows you to order shelf assemblies preinstalled in a seven-foot (2.133 m) rack. The Bay Assembly is available in a three- or four-shelf configuration. The three-shelf configuration includes three ONS 15454 shelf assemblies, a prewired fuse and alarm panel, and two cable-management trays.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.3 1.3 Front Door Figure 1-4 Cisco ONS 15454 Deep Door 115011 . The ONS 15454 door locks with a pinned hex key that ships with the ONS 15454. A button on the right side of the shelf assembly releases the door. You can remove the front door of the ONS 15454 to provide unrestricted access to the front of the shelf assembly. Before you remove the front door, you have to remove the ground strap of the front door (Figure 1-5). Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.3 1.3 Front Door ONS 15454 Front Door Ground Strap 71048 Figure 1-5 Figure 1-6 shows how to remove the front door. Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.3 1.3 Front Door Removing the ONS 15454 Front Door FAN 38831 Figure 1-6 FAIL CR IT MA J MIN Translucent circles for LED viewing Door hinge Assembly hinge pin Assembly hinge An erasable label is pasted on the inside of the front door (Figure 1-7). You can use the label to record slot assignments, port assignments, card types, node ID, rack ID, and serial number for the ONS 15454. Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.4 1.4 Backplane Covers Front-Door Erasable Label 61840 Figure 1-7 Note The front door label also includes the Class I and Class 1M laser warning (Figure 1-8). Laser Warning on the Front-Door Label 67575 Figure 1-8 1.4 Backplane Covers If a backplane does not have an EIA panel installed, it should have two sheet metal backplane covers (one on each side of the backplane) as shown in Figure 1-9 on page 1-11.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.4 1.4.1 Lower Backplane Cover Figure 1-9 Backplane Covers B A Backplane Sheet Metal Covers 32074 Lower Backplane Cover 1.4.1 Lower Backplane Cover The lower section of the ONS 15454 backplane is covered by either a clear plastic protector (15454-SA-ANSI) or a sheet metal cover (15454-SA-HD), which is held in place by five 6-32 x 1/2 inch screws.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.4 1.4.2 Rear Cover 1.4.2 Rear Cover The ONS 15454 has an optional clear plastic rear cover. This clear plastic cover provides additional protection for the cables and connectors on the backplane. Figure 1-11 shows the rear cover screw locations. Figure 1-11 Backplane Attachment for Cover 32073 Screw locations for attaching the rear cover You can also install the optional spacers if more space is needed between the cables and rear cover (Figure 1-12).
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.4 1.4.3 Alarm Interface Panel 55374 S R A UIT P N A -4 IN LE O B 65 2 N S A -C LE 0 TO TR S E O FO W -5 U R M at 7 C E B R ts V TI FE U M M dc S O O ax N R TI U S TO B N im . LE TI um IN N S S U G TA R O LL FA N A C TI E O . N Installing the Plastic Rear Cover with Spacers E T C th AU 1 pr e TI io B O B r AT1 N A to : T se an R em 1 rv d ic te ov R in rm e E g T in po al w 2 bl er B oc fro A ks m T 2 bo th Figure 1-12 1.4.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.5 1.5 Electrical Interface Assemblies You can replace the AIP on an in-service system without affecting traffic (except Ethernet traffic on nodes running a software release earlier than Release 4.0). The circuit repair feature allows you to repair circuits affected by MAC address changes on one node at a time. Circuit repair works when all nodes are running the same software version.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.5 1.5.1 EIA Installation 1.5.1 EIA Installation Optional EIA backplane covers are typically preinstalled when ordered with the ONS 15454. A minimal amount of assembly might be required when EIAs are ordered separately from the ONS 15454. If you are installing EIAs after the shelf assembly is installed, plug the EIA into the backplane. The EIA has six electrical connectors that plug into six corresponding backplane connectors.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.5 1.5.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.5 1.5.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.5 1.5.3 BNC EIA type. Use RG-59/U cable to connect to the ONS 15454 BNC EIA. These cables are recommended to connect to a patch panel and are designed for long runs. You can use BNC EIAs for DS-3 (including the DS3XM-6 and DS3XM-12) or EC-1 cards. Figure 1-13 shows the ONS 15454 with preinstalled BNC EIAs. To install coaxial cable with BNC connectors, refer to the “Install Shelf and Backplane Hardware” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.5 1.5.4 High-Density BNC EIA 1.5.3.2 BNC Insertion and Removal Tool Due to the large number of BNC connectors on the high-density BNC EIA, you might require a special tool for inserting and removing BNC EIAs (Figure 1-14). This tool also helps with ONS 15454 patch panel connections. BNC Insertion and Removal Tool 44552 Figure 1-14 This tool can be obtained with P/N 227-T1000 from: Amphenol USA (www.amphenol.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.5 1.5.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.5 1.5.5 MiniBNC EIA • DS3/EC1-48 MiniBNCs support available high-density cards in unprotected and 1:N protection (where N < 2) protection groups. Table 1-3 shows protection groups and their applicable slot assignments.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.5 1.5.5 MiniBNC EIA Figure 1-16 MiniBNC Backplane for Use in 1:N Protection Schemes Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.5 1.5.5 MiniBNC EIA Table 1-4 and Table 1-5 show the J-labelling and corresponding card ports for a shelf assembly configured with low-density electrical cards.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.5 1.5.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.5 1.5.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.5 1.5.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.5 1.5.6 SMB EIA MiniBNC Insertion and Removal Tool 115419 Figure 1-17 This tool can be obtained with P/N 227-T1000 from: Amphenol USA (www.amphenol.com) One Kennedy Drive Danbury, CT 06810 Phone: 203 743-9272 Fax: 203 796-2032 This tool can be obtained with P/N RT-1L from: Trompeter Electronics Inc. (www.trompeter.com) 31186 La Baya Drive Westlake Village, CA 91362-4047 Phone: 800 982-2629 Fax: 818 706-1040 1.5.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.5 1.5.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.5 1.5.7 AMP Champ EIA Because each DS1-14 card supports 14 DS-1 ports, only 56 pins (28 pairs) of the 64-pin connector are used. Prepare one 56-wire cable for each DS-1 facility installed. Figure 1-19 AMP Champ EIA Backplane 32070 AMP CHAMP connector Table 1-8 shows the pin assignments for the AMP Champ connectors on the ONS 15454 AMP Champ EIA. The EIA side marked “A” hosts six AMP Champ connectors.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.5 1.5.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.5 1.5.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.5 1.5.8 UBIC-V EIA 1.5.8 UBIC-V EIA UBIC-V EIAs are attached to the shelf assembly backplane to provide up to 112 transmit and receive connections through 16 SCSI connectors per side (A and B). The UBIC-V EIAs are designed to support DS-1, DS-3, and EC-1 signals. The appropriate cable assembly is required depending on the type of signal. You can install UBIC-Vs on one or both sides of the ONS 15454.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.5 1.5.9 UBIC-H EIA The UBIC-V sheet metal covers use the same screw holes as the standard sheet metal covers, but they have 12 additional holes for pan-head screws and three holes for jack screws, so you can screw down the cover and the board using standoffs on the UBIC-V board. When installed with the standard door and cabling on the backplane, the ONS 15454 shelf measures approximately 15.7 inches (399 mm) deep when partially populated with backplane cables, 16.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.5 1.5.9 UBIC-H EIA You can install UBIC-Hs on one or both sides of the ONS 15454. As you face the rear of the ONS 15454 shelf assembly, the right side is the A side (15454-EIA-UBICH-A) and the left side is the B side (15454-EIA-UBICH-B). The diagrams adjacent to each row of SCSI connectors indicate the slots and ports that correspond with each SCSI connector in that row, depending on whether you are using a high density (HD) or low density (LD) configuration.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.5 1.5.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.5 1.5.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.6 1.5.10 EIA Replacement The A and B sides each host 16 high-density, 50-pin SCSI connectors. The A-side maps to Slots 1 through 6 and the B-side maps to Slots 12 through 17. In Software Releases prior to Release 5.0, UBIC-Hs support unprotected, 1:1, and 1:N (where N < 5) protection groups. In Software R5.0 and greater, UBIC-Hs additionally support available high-density cards in unprotected and 1:N protection (where N < 2) protection groups.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.7 1.7.2 Electrical Interface Adapters Caution Always use the supplied ESD wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454. Plug the wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right outside edge of the shelf assembly. If you use DS-1 electrical twisted-pair cables, equip the ONS 15454 with an SMB EIA on each side of the backplane where DS-1 cables will terminate.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.8 1.8 UBIC-V Cables 1.8 UBIC-V Cables Note Cisco Systems announced the end-of-sale and end-of-life dates for the Cisco ONS 15454 MSPP Universal BackPlane Interface Adapter, Vertical Orientation (UBIC-V), and its DS1 and DS3 Cables. For further details, refer to Product Bulletin No. EOL5039 at http://www.cisco.com/en/US/prod/collateral/optical/ps5724/ps2006/prod_end-of-life_notice0900aecd8 052a481.html.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.8 1.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.8 1.8 UBIC-V Cables Figure 1-24 UBIC-V DS-1 Cable Schematic Diagram UBIC-V DS-1 Cable Shield to connector shell Pin 1 75Ω Signal To/From UBIC-V DS1 75Ω Port #1 1:1.15 Tip DS1 #1 100Ω Differential DS-1 To/From DSx Ring DS1 #1 FGND Pin 2 — FGnd Pin 3 — FGnd Pin 4 — FGnd Pin 5 75Ω Signal To/From UBIC-V DS1 75Ω Port #2 1:1.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.8 1.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.8 1.8 UBIC-V Cables Table 1-18 UBIC-V DS-3/EC-1 SCSI Connector Pin Out (continued) Port SCSI Pin SCSI Pin Port #5 17 42 #11 FGnd 18 43 FGnd FGnd 19 44 FGnd FGnd 20 45 FGnd #6 21 46 #12 FGnd 22 47 FGnd FGnd 23 48 FGnd FGnd 24 49 FGnd Not connected 25 50 Not connected Figure 1-25 shows the UBIC-V DS-3/EC-1 cable schematic diagram. Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.9 1.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.9 1.9 UBIC-H Cables To support DS-3 or EC-1 signals, select the DS-3/EC-1 UBIC-H cable assembly (part number 15454-CADS3-H-). DS-1 cables for the UBIC-H have a maximum supported distance of 655 feet (199.6 m). DS-1 cables arrive with unterminated #24 AWG twisted pairs on the far end and are color coded as identified in Table 1-20.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware Figure 1-26 Cable Connector Pins Pin 1 Pin 25 Pin 26 Pin 50 115171 1.9 1.9 UBIC-H Cables Table 1-19 identifies the UBIC-H SCSI connector pin assignments for the DS-1 cables as referenced from the EIA backplane to the SCSI connector. Note Conversion from the back plane’s single ended (unbalanced) 75-ohm signal to a differential (balanced) 100-ohm signal happens through the embedded transformer within the SCSI connector.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.9 1.9 UBIC-H Cables Table 1-19 UBIC-H DS-1 SCSI Connector Pin Out (continued) Port SCSI Pin SCSI Pin Port FGnd 23 48 FGnd FGnd 24 49 FGnd #13 25 50 #14 Figure 1-27 UBIC-H DS-1 Cable Schematic Diagram UBIC-H DS-1 Cable Shield to connector shell Pin 1 75Ω Signal To/From UBIC-H DS1 75Ω Port #1 1:1.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.9 1.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.9 1.9 UBIC-H Cables Table 1-21 UBIC-H DS-3/EC-1 SCSI Connector Pin Out (continued) Port SCSI Pin SCSI Pin Port #5 17 42 #11 FGnd 18 43 FGnd FGnd 19 44 FGnd FGnd 20 45 FGnd #6 21 46 #12 FGnd 22 47 FGnd FGnd 23 48 FGnd FGnd 24 49 FGnd Not connected 25 50 Not connected Figure 1-28 shows the UBIC-H DS-3/EC-1 cable schematic diagram Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.10 1.10 Ethernet Cables Figure 1-28 UBIC-H DS-3/EC-1 Cable Schematic Diagram DS-3/EC1 Cable Pin 1 DS-3 75Ω Port #1 Port #1 75Ω Signal To/From UBIC Pin 5 DS-3 75Ω Port #2 Port #2 75Ω Signal To/From FGND From/To Customer DSx Pin 42 DS-3 75Ω Port #11 Port #11 75Ω Signal To/From FGND Pin 46 DS-3 75Ω Port #12 Port #12 75Ω DS-3/EC1 signal coming to/from Tyco SCSI connector and being placed on 735A (or 735C) Coax 273809 75Ω Signal To/From 1.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.10 1.10 Ethernet Cables Table 1-22 E100-TX Connector Pinout Pin Cable Port 1 RD+ 2 RD– 3 TD+ 4 NC 5 NC 6 TD– 7 NC 8 NC Figure 1-29 shows the pin locations on 100BaseT connector. Figure 1-29 100BaseT Connector Pins H5436 1234567 8 Figure 1-30 shows the straight-through Ethernet cable schematic. Use a straight-through cable when connecting to a router or a PC.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.11 1.11 Cable Routing and Management Figure 1-31 shows the crossover Ethernet cable schematic. Use a crossover cable when connecting to a switch or hub. Crossover Cable Switch Switch 3 TD+ 6 TD– 3 TD+ 6 TD– 1 RD+ 2 RD– 1 RD+ 2 RD– H5579 Figure 1-31 1.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.11 1.11.1 Fiber Management Figure 1-32 Managing Cables on the Front Panel FAN FAIL CR IT MA J MIN 145262 Cable-routing channel posts Fold down front door 1.11.1 Fiber Management The universal cable router is designed to route fiber jumpers out of both sides of the shelf. Slots 1 to 6 exit to the left, and Slots 12 to 17 exit to the right.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.11 1.11.2 Fiber Management Using the Tie-Down Bar Table 1-23 Fiber Channel Capacity (One Side of the Shelf) Maximum Number of Fibers Exiting Each Side Fiber Diameter No Ethernet Cables One Ethernet Cable Two Ethernet Cables 1.6 mm (0.6 inch) 144 127 110 2 mm (0.7 inch) 90 80 70 3 mm (0.11 inch) 40 36 32 Plan your fiber size according to the number of cards/ports installed in each side of the shelf.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.12 1.11.4 DS-1 Twisted-Pair Cable Management 1.11.4 DS-1 Twisted-Pair Cable Management Connect twisted pair/DS-1 cables to SMB EIAs on the ONS 15454 backplane using cable connectors and DS-1 EIAs (baluns). 1.11.5 AMP Champ Cable Management EIAs have cable management eyelets to tiewrap or lace cables to the cover panel. Tie wrap or lace the AMP Champ cables according to local site practice and route the cables. If you configure the ONS 15454 for a 23-inch (584.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.12 1.12.1 Wire-Wrap and Pin Connections Figure 1-36 AEP Block Diagram AIC-I Interface (wire wrapping) TIA/EIA 485 In Alarm Relays Out Alarm Relays AEP/AIE CPLD 78406 Inventory data (EEPROM) Power Supply Each AEP alarm input port has provisionable label and severity. The alarm inputs have optocoupler isolation. They have one common 48-VDC output and a maximum of 2 mA per input.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.12 1.12.1 Wire-Wrap and Pin Connections Table 1-24 Pin Assignments for the AEP (continued) AEP Cable Wire Backplane Pin AIC-I Signal AEP Signal Violet A4 VB+ VB+ Blue A5 AE_CLK_P AE_CLK_P Green A6 AE_CLK_N AE_CLK_N Yellow A7 AE_DIN_P AE_DOUT_P Orange A8 AE_DIN_N AE_DOUT_N Red A9 AE_DOUT_P AE_DIN_P Brown A10 AE_DOUT_N AE_DIN_N Figure 1-38 is a circuit diagram of the alarm inputs (Inputs 1 and 32 are shown in the example).
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.12 1.12.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.12 1.12.1 Wire-Wrap and Pin Connections Figure 1-39 Alarm Output Circuit Diagram Station AEP/AIE Output 1 max. 60 V/100 mA 78474 Output 16 Use the pin numbers in Table 1-26 to connect to the external elements being switched by external alarms. Table 1-26 Pin Association for Alarm Output Pins AMP Champ Pin Number Signal Name AMP Champ Pin Number Signal Name 1 N.C. 27 COM_0 2 COM_1 28 N.C. 3 NO_1 29 NO_2 4 N.C. 30 COM_2 5 COM_3 31 N.C.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.13 1.13 Filler Card Table 1-26 Pin Association for Alarm Output Pins (continued) AMP Champ Pin Number Signal Name AMP Champ Pin Number Signal Name 20 COM_13 46 N.C. 21 NO_13 47 NO_14 22 N.C. 48 COM_14 23 COM_15 49 N.C. 24 NO_15 50 N.C. 25 N.C. 51 GND1 26 NO_0 52 GND2 1.13 Filler Card Filler cards are designed to occupy empty multiservice and AIC-I slots in the Cisco ONS 15454 (Slots 1 – 6, 9, and 12 – 17).
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.14 1.14 Fan-Tray Assembly Figure 1-40 Detectable Filler Card Faceplate 124234 FILLER 1.14 Fan-Tray Assembly The fan-tray assembly is located at the bottom of the ONS 15454 bay assembly. The fan tray is a removable drawer that holds fans and fan-control circuitry for the ONS 15454. The front door can be left in place or removed before installing the fan-tray assembly.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.14 1.14.1 Fan Speed and Power Requirements The front of the fan-tray assembly has an LCD screen that provides slot- and port-level information for all ONS 15454 card slots, including the number of Critical, Major, and Minor alarms. For optical cards, you can use the LCD to determine if a port is in working or protect mode and is active or standby. The LCD also tells you whether the software load is SONET or SDH and the software version number.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.15 1.14.3 Air Filter 1.14.3 Air Filter The ONS 15454 contains a reusable air filter; Model 15454-FTF2, that is installed either beneath the fan-tray assembly or in the optional external filter brackets. Earlier versions of the ONS 15454 used a disposable air filter that is installed beneath the fan-tray assembly only. However, the reusable air filter is backward compatible.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.16 1.16 Alarm, Timing, LAN, and Craft Pin Connections Figure 1-41 Ground Posts on the ONS 15454 Backplane FRAME GROUND 61852 Attach #6 AWG 1.16 Alarm, Timing, LAN, and Craft Pin Connections Caution Always use the supplied ESD wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454. Plug the wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right outside edge of the shelf assembly. The ONS 15454 has a backplane pin field located at the bottom of the backplane.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.16 1.16 Alarm, Timing, LAN, and Craft Pin Connections A ONS 15454 Backplane Pinouts (Release 3.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.16 1.16.1 Alarm Contact Connections A ONS 15454 Backplane Pinouts B A B A B A B A B A B A B A A B A B A 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 BITS 4 4 LAN ENVIR 4 ALARMS IN FG1 FG2 Field BITS FG3 Pin A1 4 4 ACO X .
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.16 1.16.2 Timing Connections Visual and audible alarms are typically wired to trigger an alarm light or bell at a central alarm collection point when the corresponding contacts are closed. You can use the Alarm Cutoff pins to activate a remote ACO for audible alarms. You can also activate the ACO function by pressing the ACO button on the TCC2/TCC2P card faceplate. The ACO function clears all audible alarm indications.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.17 1.16.4 TL1 Craft Interface Installation Table 1-29 LAN Pin Assignments Pin Field Backplane Pins RJ-45 Pins LAN 1 Connecting to data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE1, a hub or switch) B2 1 A2 2 B1 3 A1 6 B1 1 A1 2 B2 3 A2 6 LAN 1 Connecting to data terminal equipment (DTE) (a PC/workstation or router) 1. The Cisco ONS 15454 is DCE. 1.16.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.17 1.17.1 Card Slot Requirements Installing Cards in the ONS 15454 39391 Figure 1-44 FAN FAIL CR IT MAJ MIN Ejector Guide rail 1.17.1 Card Slot Requirements The ONS 15454 shelf assembly has 17 card slots numbered sequentially from left to right. Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17 are multiservice slots that are used for electrical, optical, and Ethernet cards (traffic cards).
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.17 1.17.1 Card Slot Requirements Note Protection schemes and EIA types can affect slot compatibility. Table 1-31 Symbol Color/Shape Slot and Card Symbols Definition Orange/Circle Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. Only install ONS 15454 cards with a circle symbol on the faceplate. Blue/Triangle Slots 5, 6, 12, and 13. Only install ONS 15454 cards with circle or a triangle symbol on the faceplate. Purple/Square TCC2/TCC2P slot, Slots 7 and 11.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.17 1.17.1 Card Slot Requirements Table 1-32 Card Ports, Line Rates, and Connectors (continued) Card Ports Line Rate per Port Connector Types Connector Location DS3/EC1-48 48 2.147 Gbps SMB or BNC Backplane 1 Backplane EC1-12 12 51.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.17 1.17.2 Card Replacement Table 1-32 Card Ports, Line Rates, and Connectors (continued) Card Ports Line Rate per Port Connector Types Connector Location 15454_MRC-12 12 Up to 2488.32 Mbps (STM-16), depending on SFP LC Faceplate 9.95 Gbps (STM-64) LC Faceplate OC192SR1/STM64 1 IO Short Reach/ OC192/STM64 Any Reach3 1. When used as a protect card, the card does not have a physical external connection.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.18 1.18 Software and Hardware Compatibility 1.18 Software and Hardware Compatibility Table 1-33 shows ONS 15454 software and hardware compatibility for nodes configured with XC or XCVT cards for Releases 4.6, 4.7, 5.0, 6.0, and 7.0. For software compatibility for a specific card, refer to the following URL: http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/hw/optical/ps2006/prod_eol_notices_list.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.18 1.18 Software and Hardware Compatibility Table 1-33 ONS 15454 Software and Hardware Compatibility—XC1 and XCVT Configurations (continued) Hardware Shelf Assembly2 4.6.0x (4.6) 5.0.0x (5.0) 6.0.0x (6.0) 7.0.0x (7.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.18 1.18 Software and Hardware Compatibility Table 1-33 ONS 15454 Software and Hardware Compatibility—XC1 and XCVT Configurations (continued) Hardware Shelf Assembly2 4.6.0x (4.6) 5.0.0x (5.0) 6.0.0x (6.0) 7.0.0x (7.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.18 1.18 Software and Hardware Compatibility Table 1-34 ONS 15454 Software and Hardware Compatibility—XC10G and XC-VXC-10G Configurations (continued) Shelf Assembly1 4.6.0x (4.6) 5.0.0x (5.0) 6.0.0x (6.0) 7.0.0x (7.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.18 1.18 Software and Hardware Compatibility Table 1-34 Hardware ONS 15454 Software and Hardware Compatibility—XC10G and XC-VXC-10G Configurations (continued) Shelf Assembly1 4.6.0x (4.6) 5.0.0x (5.0) 6.0.0x (6.0) 7.0.0x (7.
Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1.18 1.18 Software and Hardware Compatibility Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.
CH A P T E R 2 Common Control Cards Note The terms "Unidirectional Path Switched Ring" and "UPSR" may appear in Cisco literature. These terms do not refer to using Cisco ONS 15xxx products in a unidirectional path switched ring configuration. Rather, these terms, as well as "Path Protected Mesh Network" and "PPMN," refer generally to Cisco's path protection feature, which may be used in any topological network configuration.
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards 2.1 2.1.1 Cards Summary Table 2-1 Common Control Card Functions Card Description For Additional Information... TCC2 The Advanced Timing, Communications, and Control See the “2.2 TCC2 Card” section on page 2-6. (TCC2) card is the main processing center for the ONS 15454 and provides system initialization, provisioning, alarm reporting, maintenance, and diagnostics.
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards 2.1 2.1.2 Card Compatibility 2.1.2 Card Compatibility Table 2-2 lists the Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) software release compatibility for each common-control card. In the tables below, “Yes” means cards are compatible with the listed software versions. Table cells with dashes mean cards are not compatible with the listed software versions. Table 2-2 Common-Control Card Software Release Compatibility Card R2.2.1 R2.2.2 R3.0.1 R3.1 R3.2 R3.3 R3.4 R4.0 R4.1 R4.
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards 2.1 2.1.3 Cross-Connect Card Compatibility 2. The TCC+ is not compatible with Software R4.5 or greater. 3. The XC card does not support features new to Release 5.0 and greater. 4. These cross-connect cards are compatible only during an upgrade. Table 2-4 lists the cross-connect card compatibility for each electrical card. For electrical card software compatiblilty, see Table 3-2 on page 3-3.
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards 2.1 2.1.
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards 2.2 2.2 TCC2 Card Table 2-6 Ethernet Card Cross-Connect Compatibility (continued) Ethernet Cards XCVT Card XC10G Card1 XC-VXC-10G Card1 ML100X-8 Yes, in Slots 5, 6, 12, 13 Yes Yes CE-100T-8 Yes Yes Yes CE-1000-4 Yes Yes Yes 1. Requires a 15454-SA-ANSI or 15454-SA-HD shelf assembly. Table 2-7 lists the cross-connect card compatibility for each storage area network (SAN) card. For SAN card software compatibility, see the “6.1.
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards 2.2 2.2.
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards 2.2 2.2.2 TCC2 Card-Level Indicators The TCC2 card also originates and terminates a cell bus carried over the module. The cell bus supports links between any two cards in the node, which is essential for peer-to-peer communication. Peer-to-peer communication accelerates protection switching for redundant cards. The node database, IP address, and system software are stored in TCC2 card nonvolatile memory, which allows quick recovery in the event of a power or card failure.
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards 2.2 2.2.3 Network-Level Indicators Table 2-8 TCC2 Card-Level Indicators Card-Level LEDs Definition Red FAIL LED This LED is on during reset. The FAIL LED flashes during the boot and write process. Replace the card if the FAIL LED persists. ACT/STBY LED Indicates the TCC2 is active (green) or in standby (amber) mode. The ACT/STBY LED also provides the timing reference and shelf control.
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards 2.3 2.2.4 Power-Level Indicators 2.2.4 Power-Level Indicators Table 2-10 describes the two power-level LEDs on the TCC2 faceplate. Table 2-10 TCC2 Power-Level Indicators Power-Level LEDs Definition Green/Amber/Red PWR A LED The PWR A LED is green when the voltage on supply input A is between the low battery voltage (LWBATVG) and high battery voltage (HIBATVG) thresholds.
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards 2.3 2.3.
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards 2.3 2.3.1 TCC2P Functionality The TCC2P card also originates and terminates a cell bus carried over the module. The cell bus supports links between any two cards in the node, which is essential for peer-to-peer communication. Peer-to-peer communication accelerates protection switching for redundant cards. The node database, IP address, and system software are stored in TCC2P card nonvolatile memory, which allows quick recovery in the event of a power or card failure.
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards 2.3 2.3.2 TCC2P Card-Level Indicators card, taking about 15 to 20 minutes to complete. If the backup software version on the new TCC2P card does not match the version on the active TCC2P card, the newly inserted TCC2P card copies the backup software from the active TCC2P card again, taking about 15 to 20 minutes. Copying the database from the active TCC2P card takes about 3 minutes.
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards 2.4 2.3.4 Power-Level Indicators 2.3.4 Power-Level Indicators Table 2-13 describes the two power-level LEDs on the TCC2P faceplate. Table 2-13 TCC2P Power-Level Indicators Power-Level LEDs Definition Green/Amber/Red PWR A LED The PWR A LED is green when the voltage on supply input A is between the low battery voltage (LWBATVG) and high battery voltage (HIBATVG) thresholds.
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards 2.4 2.4.1 XCVT Functionality Figure 2-3 XCVT Faceplate and Block Diagram XCVT FAIL ACT/STBY Input ports Output ports 0 0 Ports 0 1 2 STS ASIC1 3 4 0 Ports 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 5 6 1 STS ASIC2 2 3 4 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 VT ASIC 9 10 11 11 61341 10 33678 12931 2.4.1 XCVT Functionality The STS-1 switch matrix on the XCVT card consists of 288 bidirectional ports and adds a VT matrix that can manage up to 336 bidirectional VT1.
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards 2.4 2.4.2 VT Mapping The XCVT card works with the TCC2/TCC2P cards to maintain connections and set up cross-connects within the node. The cross-connect cards (such as the XCVT and XC10G), installed in Slots 8 and 10, are required to operate the ONS 15454. You can establish cross-connect (circuit) information through CTC. The TCC2/TCC2P cards establish the proper internal cross-connect information and relay the setup information to the XCVT card.
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards 2.4 2.4.
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards 2.5 2.5 XC10G Card Table 2-15 XCVT Card-Level Indicators Card-Level Indicators Definition Red FAIL LED Indicates that the cards processor is not ready. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. ACT/STBY LED Indicates whether the XCVT card is active and carrying traffic (green) or in standby mode to the active XCVT card (amber). Green (Active) Amber (Standby) 2.5 XC10G Card Note For hardware specifications, see the “A.4.
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards 2.5 2.5.1 XC10G Functionality Figure 2-5 XC10G Faceplate and Block Diagram XC10G Line 1 FAIL Line 2 ACT/STBY Line 3 Line 4 uP Interface Span 1 Span 2 Cross-Connect Matrix Span 3 Span 4 Line 5 VT Cross-Connect Matrix Line 6 Line 7 Line 8 Ref Clk A FLASH Ref Clk B B a c k p l a n e RAM uP Interface TCCA ASIC SCL Link Protect SCL 61342 Main SCL uP 2.5.1 XC10G Functionality The XC10G card manages up to 672 bidirectional VT1.
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards 2.5 2.5.2 VT Mapping Caution Do not operate the ONS 15454 with only one XCVT or XC10G card. Two cross-connect cards of the same type (either two XCVT or two XC10G cards) must always be installed. Figure 2-6 shows the cross-connect matrix. Figure 2-6 XC10G Cross-Connect Matrix XC10G STS-1 Cross-connect ASIC (1152x1152 STS-1) Input Ports 8X STS-48 4X STS-192 Output Ports 1 1 2 2 . . . . . . . . 25 25 8X STS-48 4X STS-192 VT 1.
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards 2.5 2.5.3 XC10G Hosting DS3XM-6 or DS3XM-12 Table 2-16 VT Mapping (continued) ONS 15454 VT Number Telcordia Group/VT Number VT12 Group5/VT2 VT13 Group6/VT2 VT14 Group7/VT2 VT15 Group1/VT3 VT16 Group2/VT3 VT17 Group3/VT3 VT18 Group4/VT3 VT19 Group5/VT3 VT20 Group6/VT3 VT21 Group7/VT3 VT22 Group1/VT4 VT23 Group2/VT4 VT24 Group3/VT4 VT25 Group4/VT4 VT26 Group5/VT4 VT27 Group6/VT4 VT28 Group7/VT4 2.5.
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards 2.6 2.5.5 XCVT/XC10G/XC-VXC-10G Compatibility 2.5.5 XCVT/XC10G/XC-VXC-10G Compatibility The XC10G and XC-VXC-10G cards support the same features as the XCVT card. The XC10G or XC-VXC-10G cards are required for OC-192, OC-48 any-slot (AS), OC3-8, and OC12-4 operation. Do not use the XCVT card if you are using an OC-192, OC3-8, or OC12-4 card or if you install an OC-48 AS card in Slots 1 to 4 or 14 to 17.
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards 2.6 2.6.1 XC-VXC-10G Functionality Figure 2-7 XC-VXC-10G Faceplate and Block Diagram XC-VXC10G XC-VXC-10G Backplane Connectors SCL Bus FAIL IBPIA (2) ACT/STBY IBPIA (2) TCCA Clock FPGA STS-1 Cross Connect ASIC 2 VT Ports 2 VT Ports 6 AUX Ports FLASH 6 AUX Ports EDVT TULA GDX2 TU Cross Connect ASIC EEPROM Serial Port 2 VT Ports 2 VT Ports CPU VT Cross Connect ASIC DDR SDRAM DETLEF DDR FPGA 134364 CPLD TARAN GDX1 2.6.
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards 2.6 2.6.1 XC-VXC-10G Functionality At the STS level (high-order cross-connect), the XC-VXC-10G is always non-blocking (any STS-1 from the system can be cross-connected to any other STS-1 without limitation up to 1152 bidirectional STS-1 ports (576 STS-1 cross-connects). In addition, for “mixed” VT1.5 and VT2 grooming, 50% of the available VT resources (ports) are allocated to each VT circuit type.
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards 2.6 2.6.2 VT Mapping Figure 2-8 XC-VXC-10G Cross-Connect Matrix XC-XVC-10G STS-1 Cross-connect ASIC (1152x1152 STS-1) Input Ports 8X STS-48 4X STS-192 Output Ports 1 1 2 2 . . . . . . . . 20 20 8X STS-48 4X STS-192 6X STS-48 2X STS-48 (VT Ports) TUXC TU-3 Cross-connect ASIC (bypassed in SONETmode) VTXC VT 1.5/VT 2 Cross-connect ASIC 1344 bidirectional VT 1.5 cross-connects, or 1008 bidirectional VT 2 cross-connects, or Mixed grooming (50% VT1.
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards 2.6 2.6.3 XC-VXC-10G Hosting DS3XM-6 or DS3XM-12 Table 2-18 VT Mapping (continued) ONS 15454 VT Number Telcordia Group/VT Number VT14 Group7/VT2 VT15 Group1/VT3 VT16 Group2/VT3 VT17 Group3/VT3 VT18 Group4/VT3 VT19 Group5/VT3 VT20 Group6/VT3 VT21 Group7/VT3 VT22 Group1/VT4 VT23 Group2/VT4 VT24 Group3/VT4 VT25 Group4/VT4 VT26 Group5/VT4 VT27 Group6/VT4 VT28 Group7/VT4 2.6.
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards 2.7 2.6.5 XC-VXC-10G Compatibility 2.6.5 XC-VXC-10G Compatibility The XC-VXC-10G card supports the same features as the XC10G card. Either the XC10G or XC-VXC-10G card is required for OC-192, OC3-8, and OC12-4 operation and OC-48 AS operation. If you are using Ethernet cards, the E1000-2-G or the E100T-G must be used when the XC-VXC-10G cross-connect card is in use.
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards 2.7 2.7.1 AIC-I Card-Level Indicators Figure 2-9 AIC-I Faceplate and Block Diagram AIC-1 FAIL Fail PWR A B AIC-I Act ACT UDC-A UDC-B ACC INPUT/OUTPUT DCC-A DCC-B Express orderwire ACC (DTMF) Ring Local orderwire 12/16 x IN (DTMF) UDC-A Ring 4x IN/OUT UDC-B Ringer DCC-A Power Monitoring DCC-B RING Input LOW LED x2 AIC-I FPGA Output EOW RING EEPROM 78828 SCL links 2.7.
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards 2.7 2.7.2 External Alarms and Controls Table 2-20 AIC-I Card-Level Indicators (continued) Card-Level LEDs Description Green/Red PWR A LED The PWR A LED is green when a supply voltage within a specified range has been sensed on supply input A. It is red when the input voltage on supply input A is out of range. Green/Red PWR B LED The PWR B LED is green when a supply voltage within a specified range has been sensed on supply input B.
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards 2.7 2.7.3 Orderwire The output contacts can be provisioned to close on a trigger or to close manually. The trigger can be a local alarm severity threshold, a remote alarm severity, or a virtual wire: • Local NE alarm severity: A hierarchy of Not Reported, Not Alarmed, Minor, Major, or Critical alarm severities that you set to cause output closure. For example, if the trigger is set to Minor, a Minor alarm or above is the trigger.
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards 2.7 2.7.4 Power Monitoring The AIC-I supports selective dual tone multifrequency (DTMF) dialing for telephony connectivity, which causes one AIC-I card or all ONS 15454 AIC-I cards on the orderwire subnetwork to “ring.” The ringer/buzzer resides on the AIC-I. There is also a “ring” LED that mimics the AIC-I ringer. It flashes when a call is received on the orderwire subnetwork. A party line call is initiated by pressing *0000 on the DTMF pad.
Chapter 2 Common Control Cards 2.7 2.7.6 Data Communications Channel Table 2-22 UDC Pin Assignments RJ-11 Pin Number Description 1 For future use 2 TXN 3 RXN 4 RXP 5 TXP 6 For future use 2.7.6 Data Communications Channel The DCC features a dedicated data channel of 576 kbps (D4 to D12 bytes) between two nodes in an ONS 15454 network. Each AIC-I card provides two DCCs, DCC-A and DCC-B, through separate RJ-45 connectors on the front of the AIC-I card. Use a shielded RJ-45 cable.
CH A P T E R 3 Electrical Cards This chapter describes Cisco ONS 15454 electrical card features and functions. For installation and card turn-up procedures, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide. For information on the electrical interface assemblies (EIAs), see the “1.5 Electrical Interface Assemblies” section on page 1-14. Chapter topics include: • 3.1 Electrical Card Overview, page 3-1 • 3.2 EC1-12 Card, page 3-4 • 3.3 DS1-14 and DS1N-14 Cards, page 3-6 • 3.
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards 3.1 3.1.1 Card Summary Table 3-1 Cisco ONS 15454 Electrical Cards Card Name Description For Additional Information EC1-12 The EC1-12 card provides 12 Telcordia-compliant, GR-253 STS-1 electrical ports per card. Each port operates at 51.840 Mbps over a single 750-ohm, 728A or equivalent coaxial span. See the “3.2 EC1-12 Card” section on page 3-4. DS1-14 The DS1-14 card provides 14 Telcordia-compliant GR-499 DS-1 ports. Each port operates at 1.
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards 3.1 3.1.2 Card Compatibility Table 3-1 Cisco ONS 15454 Electrical Cards (continued) Card Name Description For Additional Information DS3XM-6 (Transmux) The DS3XM-6 card provides six TelcordiaSee the “3.9 DS3XM-6 Card” compliant GR-499-CORE M13 multiplexing section on page 3-24. functions. The DS3XM-6 converts six framed DS-3 network connections to 28x6 or 168 VT1.5s. DS3XM-12 (Transmux) The DS3XM-12 card provides 12 TelcordiaSee the “3.
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards 3.2 3.2 EC1-12 Card 3.2 EC1-12 Card Note For hardware specifications, see the “A.5.1 EC1-12 Card Specifications” section on page A-15. The EC1-12 card provides 12 Telcordia-compliant, GR-253 STS-1 electrical ports per card. Each port operates at 51.840 Mbps over a single 75-ohm, 728A or equivalent coaxial span.
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards 3.2 3.2.3 EC1-12 Hosted by XCVT, XC10G, or XC-VXC-10G Figure 3-1 EC1-12 Faceplate and Block Diagram EC1 12 FAIL ACT/STBY SF main STS1 Line Interface Unit x12 STS-12/ 12xSTS-1 Mux/Demux ASIC BTC ASIC B a c k p l a n e 61344 protect STS1 STS-1 Framer 3.2.3 EC1-12 Hosted by XCVT, XC10G, or XC-VXC-10G All 12 STS-1 payloads from an EC1-12 card are carried to the XCVT, XC10G, or XC-VXC-10G card where the payload is further aggregated for efficient transport.
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards 3.3 3.2.5 EC1-12 Port-Level Indicators Table 3-3 EC1-12 Card-Level Indicators Card-Level Indicators Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the EC1-12 card processor is not ready. Replace the unit if the FAIL LED persists. Green ACT LED The green ACT LED indicates that the EC1-12 card is operational and ready to carry traffic.
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards 3.3 3.3.2 DS1-14 and DS1N-14 Slot Compatibility If you use the DS1N-14 as a standard DS-1 card in a 1:1 protection group, you can install the DS1N-14 card in Slots 1 to 6 or 12 to 17 on the ONS 15454. If you use the card’s 1:N functionality, you must install a DS1N-14 card in Slots 3 and 15. Each DS1N-14 port features DS-n-level outputs supporting distances of up to 655 feet (200 meters) depending on facility conditions. 3.3.
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards 3.3 3.3.4 DS1-14 and DS1N-14 Hosted by XCVT, XC10G, or XC-VXC-10G Figure 3-3 DS1N-14 Faceplate and Block Diagram DS1N14 FAIL ACT/STBY SF Protection Relay Matrix 14 Line Interface Units STS1 to 14 DS1 Mapper STS-1 / STS-12 Mux/Demux ASIC BTC ASIC B a c k p l a n e DRAM FLASH 61346 uP 33678 12931 3.3.4 DS1-14 and DS1N-14 Hosted by XCVT, XC10G, or XC-VXC-10G All 14 VT1.
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards 3.4 3.3.6 DS1-14 and DS1N-14 Port-Level Indicators Table 3-4 DS1-14 and DS1N-14 Card-Level Indicators Card-Level Indicators Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card processor is not ready. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. ACT/STBY LED The green/amber ACT/STBY LED indicates whether the card is operational and ready to carry traffic (green) or in standby mode (amber).
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards 3.4 3.4.2 DS1/E1-56 Faceplate and Block Diagram Note The DS1/E1-56 card supports an errorless software-initiated cross-connect card switch when used in a shelf equipped with XC-VXC-10G and TCC2/TCC2P cards. You can install the DS1/E1-56 card in Slots 1 to 3 or 15 to 17 on the ONS 15454, but installing this card in certain slots will block the use of other slots.
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards 3.4 3.4.
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards 3.5 3.4.4 DS1/E1-56 Port-Level Indicators Table 3-6 DS1/E1-56 Card-Level Indicators Card-Level Indicators Description Red FAIL LED Indicates that the card processor is not ready. This LED is on during reset. The FAIL LED flashes during the boot process. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists in flashing. ACT/STBY LED When the ACT/STBY LED is green, the card is operational and ready to carry traffic.
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards 3.5 3.5.1 DS3-12 and DS3N-12 Slots and Connectors 3.5.1 DS3-12 and DS3N-12 Slots and Connectors You can install the DS3-12 or DS3N-12 card in Slots 1 to 6 or 12 to 17 on the ONS 15454. Each DS3-12 or DS3N-12 card port features DSX-level outputs supporting distances up to 137 meters (450 feet) depending on facility conditions. With the proper backplane EIA, the card supports BNC or SMB connectors. See the “7.
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards 3.5 3.5.3 DS3-12 and DS3N-12 Card-Level Indicators Figure 3-6 shows the DS3N-12 faceplate and a block diagram of the card. Figure 3-6 DS3N-12 Faceplate and Block Diagram DS3N 12 FAIL ACT/STBY Protection Relay Matrix 12 Line Interface Units DS3A ASIC BTC ASIC B a c k p l a n e 61348 SF 1345987 3.5.3 DS3-12 and DS3N-12 Card-Level Indicators Table 3-7 describes the three card-level LEDs on the DS3-12 and DS3N-12 card faceplates.
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards 3.6 3.5.4 DS3-12 and DS3N-12 Port-Level Indicators 3.5.4 DS3-12 and DS3N-12 Port-Level Indicators You can find the status of the 12 DS3-12 and 12 DS3N-12 card ports by using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot. 3.6 DS3/EC1-48 Card Note For hardware specifications, see the “A.5.
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards 3.6 3.6.2 DS3/EC1-48 Faceplate and Block Diagram Caution Do not install a DS3/EC1-48 card in Slots 1 or 2 if you have installed an MXP_2.5G_10G card in Slot 3. Likewise, do not install a DS3/EC1-48 card in Slots 16 or 17 if you have installed an MXP_2.5G_10G card in Slot 15. If you do, the cards will interact and cause DS-3 bit errors. With the proper backplane EIA, the card supports BNC or SCSI (UBIC) connectors. See the “7.
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards 3.6 3.6.3 DS3/EC1-48 Card-Level Indicators Figure 3-7 DS3/EC1-48 Faceplate and Block Diagram DS3 EC1 48 FAIL ACT/STBY Main & Protect SCL Bus’s MAIN IBPIA ASIC 48 DS3/EC1 Ports (UBIC-V, UBIC-H, or HD MiniBNC) Transformers & Protection Mux/Relays 4x DS3/EC1 Framer/ Mapper/ LIU STS-48 Mapper FPGA PROTECT IBPIA ASIC B a c k p l a n e 115955 SF Processor 3.6.3 DS3/EC1-48 Card-Level Indicators The DS3/EC1-48 card has three card-level LED indicators (Table 3-9).
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards 3.7 3.6.4 DS3/EC1-48 Port-Level Indicators Table 3-9 DS3/EC1-48 Card-Level Indicators Card-Level Indicators Description Red FAIL LED Indicates that the card processor is not ready. This LED is on during reset. The FAIL LED flashes during the boot process. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists in flashing. ACT/STBY LED When the ACT/STBY LED is green, the card is operational and ready to carry traffic.
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards 3.7 3.7.
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards 3.8 3.7.2 DS3i-N-12 Card-Level Indicators 3.7.2 DS3i-N-12 Card-Level Indicators Table 3-10 describes the three LEDs on the DS3i-N-12 card faceplate. Table 3-10 DS3i-N-12 Card-Level Indicators Card-Level LEDs Description Red FAIL LED Indicates that the card processor is not ready. This LED is on during reset. The FAIL LED flashes during the boot process. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists in flashing.
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards 3.8 3.8.1 DS3-12E and DS3N-12E Slots and Connectors • FEBE monitoring • FEAC status and loop code detection • Path trace byte support with TIM-P alarm generation The DS3-12E supports a 1:1 protection scheme, meaning it can operate as the protect card for one other DS3-12E card. The DS3N-12E can operate as the protect card in a 1:N (N <= 5) DS3 protection group.
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards 3.8 3.8.2 DS3-12E Faceplate and Block Diagram Figure 3-9 DS3-12E Faceplate and Block Diagram DS3 12E FAIL ACT SF main DS3-m1 protect DS3-p1 Line Interface Unit #1 DS3 ASIC BERT FPGA main DS3-m12 protect DS3-p12 Line Interface Unit #1 OHP FPGA BTC ASIC B a c k p l a n e Processor SDRAM Flash 61349 uP bus Figure 3-10 shows the DS3N-12E faceplate and a block diagram of the card. Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards 3.8 3.8.3 DS3-12E and DS3N-12E Card-Level Indicators Figure 3-10 DS3N-12E Faceplate and Block Diagram DS3 N 12E FAIL ACT/STBY SF main DS3-m1 protect DS3-p1 Line Interface Unit #1 DS3 ASIC BERT FPGA main DS3-m12 protect DS3-p12 Line Interface Unit #1 OHP FPGA BTC ASIC B a c k p l a n e uP bus SDRAM Flash 61350 Processor 3.8.3 DS3-12E and DS3N-12E Card-Level Indicators Table 3-11 describes the three card-level LEDs on the DS3-12E and DS3N-12E card faceplates.
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards 3.9 3.8.4 DS3-12E and DS3N-12E Port-Level Indicators 3.8.4 DS3-12E and DS3N-12E Port-Level Indicators You can find the status of the DS3-12E and DS3N-12E card ports by using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 fan-tray assembly. Use the LCD to quickly view the status of any port or card slot; the screen displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot. 3.9 DS3XM-6 Card Note For hardware specifications, see the “A.5.
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards 3.9 3.9.3 DS3XM-6 Hosted By XCVT, XC10G or XC-VXC-10G Figure 3-11 DS3XM-6 Faceplate and Block Diagram DS3XM 6 FAIL ACT SF Mapper unit Protection Relay Matrix 6 x Line Interface Units 6 x M13 Units DRAM 6 STS-1 / STS-12 Mux/Demux ASIC FLASH BTC ASIC B a c k p l a n e DC/DC unit 61351 uP 6 STS1 to 28 DS1 Mapper 1345987 3.9.3 DS3XM-6 Hosted By XCVT, XC10G or XC-VXC-10G The DS3XM-6 card works in conjunction with the XCVT card.
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards 3.10 3.9.5 DS3XM-6 Port-Level Indicators Table 3-12 DS3XM-6 Card-Level Indicators Card-Level Indicators Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card processor is not ready. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. ACT/STBY LED When the ACT/STBY LED is green, the DS3XM-6 card is operational and ready to carry traffic. When the ACT/STBY LED is amber, the DS3XM-6 card is operational and in standby in a 1:1 protection group.
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards 3.10 3.10.2 Ported Mode The DS3XM-12 supports three different backplane throughput configurations: • STS-48 when an XC10G or XC-VXC-10G card is used. This configuration supports the OC-48 rate in any slot. • STS-48 for the Slots 5, 6, 12, and 13 when an XCVT card is used. • STS-12 for Slot 1 through 4, and 7 through 12 slots when an XCVT card is used. This configuration is bandwidth-limiting in the portless mode of operation.
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards 3.10 3.10.5 Protection Modes 3.10.5 Protection Modes The DS3XM-12 card supports 1:1 and 1:N protection groups, where N <= 5. However, N <= 7 if one of the following conditions is true: • Only portless connections are used. • A combination of ported and portless connections is used but all the ported cards being protected are on the same side of the chassis as the protecting card.
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards 3.10 3.10.
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards 3.10 3.10.9 DS3XM-12 Card-Level Indicators Figure 3-12 DS3XM-12 Faceplate and Block Diagram DS3XM 12 FAIL ACT/STBY SF Main & Protect SCL Bus’s VT1.5 Mapped STS-1's (Both Modes) MAIN IBPIA ASIC 12 DS3 Transformers Ports & Protection Mux/Relays 12 Port DS3 LIU 4x DS3/VT1.5 Framer/ Mapper STS-24 Mapper FPGA PROTECT IBPIA ASIC B a c k p l a n e 115956 DS3 Mapped STS’1s (Portless Mode) Processor 3.10.
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards 3.10 3.10.10 DS3XM-12 Port-Level Indicators Table 3-15 DS3XM-12 Card-Level Indicators Card-Level Indicators Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card processor is not ready. It is steady while the self-test runs, and blinks during provisioning. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. ACT/STBY LED Green (Active) When the ACT/STBY LED is green, the DS3XM-12 card is operational and ready to carry traffic.
Chapter 3 Electrical Cards 3.10 3.10.10 DS3XM-12 Port-Level Indicators Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.
CH A P T E R 4 Optical Cards Note The terms "Unidirectional Path Switched Ring" and "UPSR" may appear in Cisco literature. These terms do not refer to using Cisco ONS 15xxx products in a unidirectional path switched ring configuration. Rather, these terms, as well as "Path Protected Mesh Network" and "PPMN," refer generally to Cisco's path protection feature, which may be used in any topological network configuration.
Chapter 4 Optical Cards 4.1 4.1 Optical Card Overview • 4.20 Optical Card SFPs and XFPs, page 4-49 4.1 Optical Card Overview Each card is marked with a symbol that corresponds to a slot (or slots) on the ONS 15454 shelf assembly. The cards are then installed into slots displaying the same symbols. See the “1.17 Cards and Slots” section on page 1-68 for a list of slots and symbols. 4.1.1 Card Summary Table 4-1 lists the Cisco ONS 15454 optical cards.
Chapter 4 Optical Cards 4.1 4.1.1 Card Summary Table 4-1 Optical Cards for the ONS 15454 (continued) Card Port Description For Additional Information... OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 The OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 card provides one long-range OC-12 port and operates at 1550 nm. See the “4.6 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 Card” section on page 4-13. OC12 IR/STM4 SH The OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 card provides four 1310-4 intermediate- or short-range OC-12 ports and operates at 1310 nm. See the “4.
Chapter 4 Optical Cards 4.1 4.1.2 Card Compatibility Table 4-1 Optical Cards for the ONS 15454 (continued) Card Port Description For Additional Information... 15454_MRC-12 The 15454_MRC-12 card provides up to twelve OC-3 or OC-12 ports, or up to four STM-16 ports, using dense wave division multiplexing (DWDM) SFPs. The card operates in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. See the “4.18 15454_MRC-12 Multirate Card” section on page 4-41.
Chapter 4 Optical Cards 4.2 4.2 OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 Card Table 4-2 Optical Card Software Release Compatibility (continued) Optical Card R2.2.1 R2.2.2 R3.0.1 R3.1 R3.2 R3.3 R3.4 R4.0 R4.1 R4.51 R4.6 R4.71 R5.0 R6.0 R7.
Chapter 4 Optical Cards 4.2 4.2 OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 Card The OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 card provides four intermediate or short range SONET/SDH OC-3 ports compliant with ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.957, and Telcordia GR-253-CORE. Each port operates at 155.52 Mbps over a single-mode fiber span. The card supports Virtual Tributary (VT), nonconcatenated (STS-1), or concatenated (STS-1 or STS-3c) payloads. Figure 4-1 shows the OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 faceplate and a block diagram of the card.
Chapter 4 Optical Cards 4.3 4.2.1 OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 Card-Level Indicators The OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 card detects loss of signal (LOS), loss of frame (LOF), loss of pointer (LOP), line-layer alarm indication signal (AIS-L), and line-layer remote defect indication (RDI-L) conditions. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide for a description of these conditions. The card also counts section and line bit interleaved parity (BIP) errors.
Chapter 4 Optical Cards 4.3 4.3 OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 Card Warning The laser is on when the optical card is booted. The port does not have to be in service for the laser to be on. Statement 293 Figure 4-2 shows the card faceplate and block diagram.
Chapter 4 Optical Cards 4.4 4.3.1 OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 Card-Level Indicators 4.3.1 OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 Card-Level Indicators Table 4-4 describes the three card-level LEDs on the eight-port OC3 IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 card. Table 4-4 OC3IR/STM1 SH 1310-8 Card-Level Indicators Card-Level LED Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. This LED is on during reset. The FAIL LED flashes during the boot process. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists.
Chapter 4 Optical Cards 4.4 4.4.
Chapter 4 Optical Cards 4.5 4.4.2 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 Port-Level Indicators Table 4-5 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 Card-Level Indicators Card-Level Indicators Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. This LED is on during reset. The FAIL LED flashes during the boot process. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. Green/Amber ACT LED The green ACT LED indicates that the card is operational and is carrying traffic or is traffic-ready.
Chapter 4 Optical Cards 4.5 4.5.
Chapter 4 Optical Cards 4.6 4.5.2 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 Port-Level Indicators Table 4-6 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 Card-Level Indicators Card-Level Indicators Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. Green/Amber ACT LED The green ACT LED indicates that the card is operational and is carrying traffic or is traffic-ready. The amber ACT LED indicates that the card is part of an active ring switch (BLSR).
Chapter 4 Optical Cards 4.6 4.6.1 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 Card-Level Indicators Figure 4-5 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 Faceplate and Block Diagram OC12LR STM4LH 1550 FAIL ACT SF STS-12 Tx 1 OC-12 Rx Mux/ Demux Optical Transceiver Flash STS-12 BTC ASIC RAM Main SCI uP bus Protect SCI B a c k p l a n e 61355 uP 33678 12931 You can install the OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 card in Slots 1 to 4 and 14 to 17. The OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 can be provisioned as part of a two-fiber BLSR, path protection, or linear ADM.
Chapter 4 Optical Cards 4.7 4.6.2 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 Port-Level Indicators Table 4-7 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 Card-Level Indicators Card-Level Indicators Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. Green/Amber ACT LED The green ACT LED indicates that the card is operational and ready to carry traffic. The amber ACT LED indicates that the card is part of an active ring switch (BLSR).
Chapter 4 Optical Cards 4.7 4.
Chapter 4 Optical Cards 4.8 4.7.1 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 Card-Level Indicators 4.7.1 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 Card-Level Indicators Table 4-8 describes the three card-level LEDs on the OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 card. Table 4-8 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 Card-Level Indicators Card-Level Indicators Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists.
Chapter 4 Optical Cards 4.8 4.8.1 OC48 IR 1310 Card-Level Indicators Figure 4-7 OC48 IR 1310 Faceplate and Block Diagram OC48 IR 1310 FAIL ACT SF Tx 1 OC-48 Rx Optical Transceiver Flash Mux/ Demux RAM B a c k Main SCI p l a Protect SCI n e STS-48 BTC ASIC uP bus 61356 uP 33678 12931 You can install the OC48 IR 1310 card in Slots 5, 6, 12, and 13, and provision the card as a drop or span card in a two-fiber or four-fiber BLSR, path protection, or in an ADM (linear) configuration.
Chapter 4 Optical Cards 4.9 4.8.2 OC48 IR 1310 Port-Level Indicators Table 4-9 OC48 IR 1310 Card-Level Indicators Card-Level Indicators Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. Green/Amber ACT LED The green ACT LED indicates that the card is carrying traffic or is traffic-ready. The amber ACT LED indicates that the card is part of an active ring switch (BLSR).
Chapter 4 Optical Cards 4.9 4.9.1 OC48 LR 1550 Card-Level Indicators Figure 4-8 OC48 LR 1550 Faceplate and Block Diagram OC48 LR 1550 FAIL ACT SF Tx 1 OC-48 Rx Optical Transceiver Flash Mux/ Demux RAM uP bus B a c k Main SCI p l a Protect SCI n e STS-48 BTC ASIC 61359 uP 33678 12931 You can install OC48 LR 1550 cards in Slots 5, 6, 12, and 13 and provision the card as a drop or span card in a two-fiber or four-fiber BLSR, path protection, or ADM (linear) configuration.
Chapter 4 Optical Cards 4.10 4.9.2 OC48 LR 1550 Port-Level Indicators Table 4-10 OC48 LR 1550 Card-Level Indicators Card-Level Indicators Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. Green/Amber ACT LED The green ACT LED indicates that the card is carrying traffic or is traffic-ready. The amber ACT LED indicates that the card is part of an active ring switch (BLSR).
Chapter 4 Optical Cards 4.10 4.10.
Chapter 4 Optical Cards 4.11 4.10.2 OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 Port-Level Indicators Table 4-11 OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 Card-Level Indicators Card-Level Indicators Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. Green/Amber ACT LED The green ACT LED indicates that the card is carrying traffic or is traffic-ready. The amber ACT LED indicates that the card is part of an active ring switch (BLSR).
Chapter 4 Optical Cards 4.11 4.11.
Chapter 4 Optical Cards 4.12 4.11.2 OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 Port-Level Indicators Table 4-12 OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 Card-Level Indicators Card-Level Indicators Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. Green/Amber ACT LED The green ACT LED indicates that the card is carrying traffic or is traffic-ready. The amber ACT LED indicates that the card is part of an active ring switch (BLSR).
Chapter 4 Optical Cards 4.12 4.12 OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz Cards Figure 4-11 OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz Faceplate and Block Diagram OC48ELR STM16EH 100GHz 1560.61 FAIL ACT/STBY SF TX 1 RX OC-48 Optical Transceiver Flash Mux/ Demux RAM uP bus B a c k Main SCI p l a Protect SCI n e STS-48 BTC ASIC 61613 uP Nineteen of the cards operate in the blue band with spacing of 100 GHz on the ITU grid (1528.77 nm, 1530.33 nm, 1531.12 nm, 1531.90 nm, 1532.68 nm, 1533.47 nm, 1534.25 nm, 1535.04 nm, 1535.
Chapter 4 Optical Cards 4.13 4.12.1 OC48 ELR 100 GHz Card-Level Indicators ONS 15216 100-GHz filters, the link budget is reduced by the insertion loss of the filters plus an additional 2-dB power penalty. The wavelength stability of the OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz cards is +/– 0.12 nm for the life of the product and over the full range of operating temperatures. Each interface contains a transmitter and receiver. The OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz cards detect LOS, LOF, LOP, and AIS-L conditions.
Chapter 4 Optical Cards 4.13 4.13 OC48 ELR 200 GHz Cards Figure 4-12 OC48 ELR 200 GHz Faceplate and Block Diagram OC48 ELR 1530.33 FAIL ACT/STBY SF TX 1 RX OC-48 Optical Transceiver Flash Mux/ Demux RAM uP bus B a c k Main SCI p l a Protect SCI n e STS-48 BTC ASIC 61360 uP Nine of the cards operate in the blue band with spacing of 200 GHz on the ITU grid (1530.33 nm, 1531.90 nm, 1533.47 nm, 1535.04 nm, 1536.61 nm, 1538.19 nm, 1539.77 nm, 1541.35 nm, and 1542.94 nm).
Chapter 4 Optical Cards 4.14 4.13.1 OC48 ELR 200 GHz Card-Level Indicators The OC48 ELR 200 GHz cards support extended long-reach applications in conjunction with optical amplification. Using electro-absorption technology, the OC48 DWDM cards provide a solution at the lower extended long-reach distances. The OC48 ELR 200 GHz interface features a 1550-nm laser and contains a transmit and receive connector (labeled) on the card faceplate.
Chapter 4 Optical Cards 4.14 4.14.1 OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 Card-Level Indicators Warning The laser is on when the optical card is booted. The port does not have to be in service for the laser to be on. Statement 293 Figure 4-13 shows the OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 faceplate and block diagram.
Chapter 4 Optical Cards 4.15 4.14.2 OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 Port-Level Indicators Table 4-15 OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 Card-Level Indicators Card-Level LED Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. This LED is on during reset. The FAIL LED flashes during the boot process. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. ACT/STBY LED If the ACT/STBY LED is green, the card is operational and ready to carry traffic.
Chapter 4 Optical Cards 4.15 4.15.
Chapter 4 Optical Cards 4.16 4.15.2 OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 Port-Level Indicators Table 4-16 OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 Card-Level Indicators Card-Level LED Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. This LED is on during reset. The FAIL LED flashes during the boot process. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. ACT/STBY LED If the ACT/STBY LED is green, the card is operational and ready to carry traffic.
Chapter 4 Optical Cards 4.16 4.16 OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 Card Warning The laser is on when the optical card is booted. The port does not have to be in service for the laser to be on. Statement 293 Figure 4-15 shows the OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 (15454-OC192LR1550) faceplate and a block diagram of the card.
Chapter 4 Optical Cards 4.16 4.16 OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 Card Figure 4-16 Enlarged Section of the OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 (15454-OC192LR1550) Faceplate TX DANGER - INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION MAY BE EMITTED FROM THE END OF UNTERMINATED FIBER CABLE OR CONNECTOR. DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS. RX ! Class 1M (IEC) Class 1 (CDRH) 67465 MAX INPUT POWER LEVEL - 10dBm Figure 4-17 shows the OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 (15454-OC192-LR2) faceplate and a block diagram of the card.
Chapter 4 Optical Cards 4.16 4.16 OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 Card Figure 4-17 OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 (15454-OC192-LR2) Faceplate and Block Diagram 1550 FAIL ACT/STBY SF OC-192/STM-64 STS Optical transceiver Demux CDR Mux SCL BTC ASIC TX 1 OC-192/STM-64 RX Optical transceiver Mux CK Mpy STS Mux SCL RX ! B a c k p l a n e MAX INPUT POWER LEVEL -7 dBm SRAM Flash Processor 115222 ADC x 8 Figure 4-18 shows an enlarged view of the faceplate warning on 15454-OC192LR1550.
Chapter 4 Optical Cards 4.16 4.16 OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 Card Figure 4-18 Enlarged Section of the OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 (15454-OC192-LR2)Faceplate 1550 FAIL ACT/STBY SF RX ! MAX INPUT POWER LEVEL -7 dBm TX 1 RX RX ! DATED JULY 26, 2001 LASER NOTICE No.50, AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO 115226 DATED JULY 26, 2001 LASER NOTICE No.50, AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10 COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.
Chapter 4 Optical Cards 4.17 4.16.1 OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 Card-Level Indicators The card port features a 1550-nm laser and contains a transmit and receive connector (labeled) on the card faceplate.The card uses a dual SC connector for optical cable termination. The card supports 1+1 unidirectional and bidirectional facility protection. It also supports 1:1 protection in four-fiber BLSR applications where both span switching and ring switching might occur.
Chapter 4 Optical Cards 4.17 4.17 OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx Card Sixteen distinct OC-192/STM-64 ITU 100 GHz DWDM cards comprise the ONS 15454 DWDM channel plan. Each OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx card provides one long-reach STM-64/OC-192 port per card, compliant with ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.957, and Telcordia GR-253-CORE (except minimum and maximum transmit power, and minimum receive power). The port operates at 9.
Chapter 4 Optical Cards 4.17 4.17.1 OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx Card-Level Indicators Figure 4-20 OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx Block Diagram STM-64/ OC-192 STM-64 / OC192 Optical transceiver Demux CDR Demux SCL BTC ASIC STM-64 / OC192 Optical transceiver Mux CK Mpy SRAM Flash SCL B a c k p l a n e Processor 63121 ADC x 8 Mux STM-64/ OC-192 Note You must use a 20-dB fiber attenuator (15 to 25 dB) when working with the OC192 LR/STM64 LH 15xx.xx card in a loopback.
Chapter 4 Optical Cards 4.18 4.17.2 OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx Port-Level Indicators Table 4-18 OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx Card-Level Indicators Card-Level LED Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. This LED is on during reset. The FAIL LED flashes during the boot process. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. ACT/STBY LED If the ACT/STBY LED is green, the card is operational and ready to carry traffic.
Chapter 4 Optical Cards 4.18 4.18.1 Slot Compatibility by Cross-Connect Card 15454_MRC-12 Card Faceplate and Block Diagram OC-3/12/48 (STM-1/4/16) COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10 AND 1040.11 EXCEPT FOR DEVIATIONS PURSUANT TO LASER NOTICE No. 50, DATED JULY 26, 2001 OC-3/12 (STM-1/4/) OC-3/12 (STM-1/4) OC-3/12/48 (STM-1/4/16) OC-3/12 (STM-1/4) OC-3/12 (STM-1/4) OC-3/12/48 (STM-1/4/16) OC-3/12 (STM-1/4) OC-3/12 (STM-1/4) OC-3/12/48 (STM-1/4/16) OC-3/12 (STM-1/4) OC-3/12 (STM-1/4) Main SCL Intfc.
Chapter 4 Optical Cards 4.18 4.18.2 Ports and Line Rates The maximum bandwidth of the 15454_MRC-12 card is determined by the cross-connect card, as shown in Table 4-19. Table 4-19 Maximum Bandwidth by Shelf Slot for the 15454_MRC-12 in Different Cross-Connect Configurations XC Card Type Maximum Bandwidth in Slots 1 through 4 Maximum Bandwidth and 14 through 17 in Slots 5, 6, 12, or 13 XCVT OC-12 OC-48 XC10G/XC-VXC-10G OC-48 OC-192 4.18.
Chapter 4 Optical Cards 4.18 4.18.2 Ports and Line Rates – If Port 10 is used as an OC-3, Ports 9, 11, and 12 can be used as an OC-3 or OC-12. – Any port can be used as an OC-12 or OC-3, as long as all of the above rules are followed. Table 4-20 shows the 15454_MRC-12 port availability and line rate for each port, based on total available bandwidth. To use the table, go to the rows for the bandwidth that you have available, as determined in Table 4-19.
Chapter 4 Optical Cards 4.18 4.18.
Chapter 4 Optical Cards 4.19 4.18.4 15454_MRC-12 Port-Level Indicators Table 4-21 15454_MRC-12 Card-Level Indicators Card-Level LED Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card’s processor is not ready. This LED is on during reset. The FAIL LED flashes during the boot process. Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists. ACT/STBY LED If the ACT/STBY LED is green, the card is operational and ready to carry traffic.
Chapter 4 Optical Cards 4.19 4.19 OC192SR1/STM64IO Short Reach and OC192/STM64 Any Reach Cards LR-2 XFP module. The XFP SR, IR, and LR interfaces each provide one bidirectional OC192/STM64 interface compliant with the recommendations defined by ITU-T G.91. SR-1 is compliant with ITU-T I-64.1, IR-2 is compliant with ITU G.691 S-64.2b, and LR-2 is compliant with ITU G.959.1 P1L1-2D2. The cards are used only in Slots 5, 6, 12, and 13.
Chapter 4 Optical Cards 4.19 4.
Chapter 4 Optical Cards 4.20 4.19.1 OC192SR1/STM64IO Short Reach and OC192/STM64 Any Reach Card-Level Indicators 4.19.1 OC192SR1/STM64IO Short Reach and OC192/STM64 Any Reach Card-Level Indicators Table 4-22 describes the three card-level LEDs on the OC192SR1/STM64IO Short Reach and OC192/STM64 Any Reach cards.
Chapter 4 Optical Cards 4.20 4.20.2 SFP Description Table 4-23 SFP and XFP Card Compatibility Compatible SFPs and XFPs (Cisco Product ID) Cisco Top Assembly Number (TAN)1 15454_MRC-12 (ONS 15454 SONET/SDH) ONS-SI-2G-S1 ONS-SI-2G-I1 ONS-SI-2G-L1 ONS-SI-2G-L2 ONS-SC-2G-30.3 through ONS-SC-2G-60.
Chapter 4 Optical Cards 4.20 4.20.3 XFP Description Actuator/Button SFP Figure 4-25 Bail Clasp SFP 63067 63066 Figure 4-24 SFP dimensions are: • Height 0.03 in. (8.5 mm) • Width 0.53 in. (13.4 mm) • Depth 2.22 in. (56.
Chapter 4 Optical Cards 4.20 4.20.4 PPM Provisioning Bail Clasp XFP (Unlatched) Figure 4-27 Bail Clasp XFP (Latched) 115719 115720 Figure 4-26 XFP dimensions are: • Height 0.33 in. (8.5 mm) • Width 0.72 in. (18.3 mm) • Depth 3.1 in.
CH A P T E R 5 Ethernet Cards Note The terms "Unidirectional Path Switched Ring" and "UPSR" may appear in Cisco literature. These terms do not refer to using Cisco ONS 15xxx products in a unidirectional path switched ring configuration. Rather, these terms, as well as "Path Protected Mesh Network" and "PPMN," refer generally to Cisco's path protection feature, which may be used in any topological network configuration.
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards 5.1 5.1.1 Ethernet Cards Note Each card is marked with a symbol that corresponds to a slot (or slots) on the ONS 15454 shelf assembly. The cards are then installed into slots displaying the same symbols. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide for a list of slots and symbols. 5.1.1 Ethernet Cards Table 5-1 lists the Cisco ONS 15454 Ethernet cards. Table 5-1 Ethernet Cards for the ONS 15454 Card Port Description For Additional Information...
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards 5.2 5.1.2 Card Compatibility Table 5-1 Ethernet Cards for the ONS 15454 (continued) Card Port Description For Additional Information... CE-100T-8 The CE-100T-8 card provides eight IEEE-compliant, 10/100-Mbps ports. The CE-100T-8 can operate with the XC10G, XC-VXC-10G, or XCVT cross-connect cards. See the “5.11 CE-100T-8 Card” section on page 5-25. CE-1000-4 The CE-1000-4 card provides four IEEE-compliant, 1000-Mbps ports.
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards 5.2 5.2 E100T-12 Card autoconfigure to operate at either half or full duplex and determine whether to enable or disable flow control. You can also configure Ethernet ports manually. Figure 5-1 shows the faceplate and a block diagram of the card.
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards 5.2 5.2.1 Slot Compatibility 5.2.1 Slot Compatibility You can install the E100T-12 card in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. Multiple E-Series Ethernet cards installed in an ONS 15454 can act independently or as a single Ethernet switch. You can create logical SONET ports by provisioning STS channels to the packet switch entity within the ONS 15454. Logical ports can be created with a bandwidth granularity of STS-1. The E100T-12 supports STS-1, STS-3c, STS-6c, and STS-12c circuit sizes.
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards 5.3 5.3 E100T-G Card 5.3 E100T-G Card Note For hardware specifications, see the “A.7.2 E100T-G Card Specifications” section on page A-44. The ONS 15454 uses E100T-G cards for Ethernet (10 Mbps) and Fast Ethernet (100 Mbps). Each card provides 12 switched, IEEE 802.3-compliant, 10/100BaseT Ethernet ports that can independently detect the speed of an attached device (autosense) and automatically connect at the appropriate speed.
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards 5.3 5.3.1 Slot Compatibility Each E100T-G card supports standards-based, wire-speed, Layer 2 Ethernet switching between its Ethernet interfaces. The IEEE 802.1Q tag logically isolates traffic (typically subscribers). IEEE 802.1Q also supports multiple classes of service. Note When making an STS-12c Ethernet circuit, the E-Series cards must be configured as single-card EtherSwitch. 5.3.1 Slot Compatibility You can install the E100T-G card in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17.
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards 5.4 5.3.4 Cross-Connect Compatibility Table 5-6 E100T-G Port-Level Indicators LED State Description Yellow (Active) Port is active (transmitting or receiving data). By default, indicates the transmitter is active but can be software controlled to indicate link status, duplex status, or receiver active. Solid Green (Link) Link is established.
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards 5.4 5.
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards 5.4 5.4.1 Slot Compatibility 5.4.1 Slot Compatibility You can install the E1000-2 card in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17. The E1000-2 is compatible with the XCVT card but not the XC10G or and XC-VXC-10G cards. The E1000-2-G is compatible with the XC10G and XC-VXC-10G. 5.4.2 E1000-2 Card-Level Indicators The E1000-2 card faceplate has two card-level LED indicators, described in Table 5-7.
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards 5.5 5.5 E1000-2-G Card 5.5 E1000-2-G Card Note For hardware specifications, see the “A.7.4 E1000-2-G Card Specifications” section on page A-45. The ONS 15454 uses E1000-2-G cards for Gigabit Ethernet (1000 Mbps). The E1000-2-G card provides two IEEE-compliant, 1000-Mbps ports for high-capacity customer LAN interconnections. Each port supports full-duplex operation. The E1000-2-G card uses GBIC modular receptacles for the optical interfaces. For details, see the “5.
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards 5.5 5.
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards 5.5 5.5.1 E1000-2-G Card-Level Indicators You can create logical SONET ports by provisioning STS channels to the packet switch entity within the ONS 15454. Logical ports can be created with a bandwidth granularity of STS-1. The ONS 15454 supports STS-1, STS-3c, STS-6c, or STS-12c circuit sizes. Note When making an STS-12c Ethernet circuit, the E-Series cards must be configured as a single-card EtherSwitch. 5.5.
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards 5.6 5.6 G1000-4 Card 5.6 G1000-4 Card The G1000-4 card requires the XC10G card. The ONS 15454 uses G1000-4 cards for Gigabit Ethernet (1000 Mbps). The G1000-4 card provides four ports of IEEE-compliant, 1000-Mbps interfaces. Each port supports full-duplex operation for a maximum bandwidth of OC-48 on each card. The G1000-4 card uses GBIC modular receptacles for the optical interfaces. For details, see the “5.13 Ethernet Card GBICs and SFPs” section on page 5-31.
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards 5.6 5.6.1 STS-24c Restriction switches (such as 1+1 automatic protection switching [APS], path protection, or bidirectional line switch ring [BLSR]). Full provisioning support is possible through Cisco Transport Controller (CTC), Transaction Language One (TL1), or Cisco Transport Manager (CTM). The circuit sizes supported are STS-1, STS-3c, STS-6c, STS-9c, STS-12c, STS-24c, and STS-48c. 5.6.
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards 5.7 5.6.4 Slot Compatibility Table 5-12 G1000-4 Port-Level Indicators Port-Level LED Status Description Off No link exists to the Ethernet port. Steady amber A link exists to the Ethernet port, but traffic flow is inhibited. For example, an unconfigured circuit, an error on line, or a nonenabled port might inhibit traffic flow. Solid green A link exists to the Ethernet port, but no traffic is carried on the port.
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards 5.7 5.7.
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards 5.7 5.7.2 G1K-4 Compatibility If STS-24c circuits are not being dropped on the card, the full 48 STSs bandwidth can be used with no restrictions (for example, using either a single STS-48c or 4 STS-12c circuits). Note The STS-24c restriction only applies when a single STS-24c circuit is dropped; therefore, you can easily minimize the impact of this restriction. Group the STS-24c circuits together on a card separate from circuits of other sizes.
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards 5.8 5.8 ML100T-12 Card Table 5-14 G1K-4 Port-Level Indicators (continued) Port-Level LED Status Description Solid green A link exists to the Ethernet port, but no traffic is carried on the port. Flashing green A link exists to the Ethernet port, and traffic is carried on the port. The LED flash rate reflects the traffic rate for the port. 5.8 ML100T-12 Card Note For hardware specifications, see the “A.7.8 ML100T-12 Card Specifications” section on page A-46.
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards 5.8 5.8.1 ML100T-12 Card-Level Indicators Figure 5-7 ML100T-12 Faceplate and Block Diagram ML100T 12 BPIA Main Rx ACT Packet Buffer 6MB FAIL 0 SMII Packet Buffer 6MB RGGI Packet Buffer 4MB BPIA Protect Rx RGGI 1 4 2 4xMag. 2 3 12 x RJ45 4 2 4 2 4xMag. Octal PHY 6 port 0 port 1 port 2 port A DOS FPGA 2 BTC192 5 6 6 4 4xMag.
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards 5.9 5.8.2 ML100T-12 Port-Level Indicators Table 5-15 ML100T-12 Card-Level Indicators Card-Level LEDs Description FAIL LED (Red) The red FAIL LED indicates that the card processor is not ready or that a catastrophic software failure occurred on the ML100T-12 card. As part of the boot sequence, the FAIL LED is turned on until the software deems the card operational. ACT LED (Green) The green ACT LED provides the operational status of the ML100T-12.
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards 5.9 5.9 ML100X-8 Card Figure 5-8 shows the card faceplate and block diagram. Figure 5-8 ML100X-8 Faceplate and Block Diagram ML 100X8 FAIL ACT Tx 0 Rx Tx 2 Rx Tx 3 Rx SFP SFP SFP SFP SFP Tx 4 Rx Tx 5 Rx PHY Network Processor Unit SFP SFP SONET Framer B a c k p l a n e SFP Tx 6 Rx TCAM 131786 Tx 1 Rx Packet Memory Tx 7 Rx The card features two virtual packet over SONET (POS) ports with a maximum combined bandwidth of STS-48.
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards 5.10 5.9.1 ML100X-8 Card-Level Indicators 5.9.1 ML100X-8 Card-Level Indicators The ML100X-8 card supports two card-level LED indicators. Table 5-17 describes the card-level indicators. Table 5-17 ML100X-8 Card-Level Indicators Card-Level LEDs Description FAIL LED (Red) The red FAIL LED indicates that the card processor is not ready or that a catastrophic software failure occurred on the ML100-FX card.
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards 5.10 5.10 ML1000-2 Card SFP modules are offered as separate orderable products for maximum customer flexibility. For details, see the “5.13 Ethernet Card GBICs and SFPs” section on page 5-31. Figure 5-9 shows the ML1000-2 card faceplate.
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards 5.11 5.10.1 ML1000-2 Card-Level Indicators 5.10.1 ML1000-2 Card-Level Indicators The ML1000-2 card faceplate has two card-level LED indicators, described in Table 5-19. Table 5-19 ML1000-2 Card-Level Indicators Card-Level LEDs Description SF LED (Red) The red FAIL LED indicates that the card processor is not ready or that a catastrophic software failure occurred on the ML1000-2 card.
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards 5.11 5.11 CE-100T-8 Card The CE-100T8 card also supports the link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS), which allows hitless dynamic adjustment of SONET link bandwidth. The CE-100T-8 card’s LCAS is hardware-based, but the CE-100T-8 also supports SW-LCAS. This makes it compatible with the ONS 15454 SDH ML-Series card, which supports only SW-LCAS and does not support the standard hardware-based LCAS.
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards 5.11 5.11.1 CE-100T-8 Card-Level Indicators switching, and classification. The Ethernet frames are then passed to the Ethermap where Ethernet traffic is terminated and is encapsulated using HDLC or GFP framing on a per port basis. The encapsulated Ethernet frames are then mapped into a configurable number of virtual concatenated low and high order payloads, such as VT1.5 synchronous payload envelope (SPE), STS-1 SPE, or a contiguous concatenated payload such as STS-3c SPE.
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards 5.12 5.11.3 Cross-Connect and Slot Compatibility Table 5-22 CE-100T-8 Port-Level Indicators Port-Level Indicators Description ACT LED (Amber) A steady amber LED indicates a link is detected, but there is an issue inhibiting traffic. A blinking amber LED means traffic flowing. LINK LED (Green) A steady green LED indicates that a link is detected, but there is no traffic.
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards 5.12 5.12 CE-1000-4 Card The CE-1000-4 card provides multiple management options through Cisco Transport Controller (CTC), Cisco Transport Manager (CTM), Transaction Language 1 (TL1), and Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP). The CE-1000-4 card supports the software link capacity adjustment scheme (SW-LCAS). This makes it compatible with the ONS 15454 CE-100T-8 and ML-Series cards.
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards 5.12 5.12.1 CE-1000-4 Card-Level Indicators Figure 5-11 CE-1000-4 Faceplate and Block Diagram CE-1000-4 FAIL 8260 Processor, SDRAM Flash and DecodePLD ACT GBIC Protect RX BPIA SERDES Protect TX BPIA Rx 1 Tx GBIC ACT/LNK Rx 2 SERDES Malena FPGA Altera 4 ports: GigE Tx ACT/LNK GBIC TADM SERDES Main RX BPIA CDR Framer Rx 3 Tx ACT/LNK GBIC BUFFER MEMORY SERDES Rx 4 Tx CLOCK Generation 50MHz,100Mhz 125Mhz,155MHz Diff. Delay. Mem. POWER 5V, 3.3V, 2.5V, 1.
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards 5.13 5.12.2 CE-1000-4 Port-Level Indicators 5.12.2 CE-1000-4 Port-Level Indicators The CE-1000-4 card provides a pair of LEDs for each Gigabit Ethernet port: an amber LED for activity (ACT) and a green LED for link stat us (LINK). Table 5-24 describes the status that each color represents. Table 5-24 CE-1000-4 Port-Level Indicators Port-Level Indicators Description Off No link exists to the Ethernet port.
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards 5.13 5.13.
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards 5.13 5.13.3 G-1K-4 DWDM and CWDM GBICs • Depth 2.56 in. (6.5 cm) GBIC temperature ranges are: • COM—commercial operating temperature range -5•C to 70•C • EXT—extended operating temperature range 0•C to 85•C • IND—industrial operating temperature range -40•C to 85•C Figure 5-12 GBICs with Clips (left) and with a Handle (right) Clip Handle Receiver Transmitter 51178 Receiver Transmitter 5.13.3 G-1K-4 DWDM and CWDM GBICs DWDM (15454-GBIC-xx.x, 15454E-GBIC-xx.
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards 5.13 5.13.3 G-1K-4 DWDM and CWDM GBICs Table 5-26 Supported Wavelengths for CWDM GBICs Corresponding GBIC Colors Gray Violet Blue Green Yellow Orange Red Br Band 49 51 53 55 57 59 61 47 The ONS 15454-supported DWDM GBICs reach up to 100 to 120 km over single-mode fiber and support 32 different wavelengths in the red and blue bands.
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards 5.13 5.13.4 SFP Description Figure 5-14 G-Series with CWDM/DWDM GBICs in Cable Network Conventional GigE signals GigE / GigE / GigE over 's HFC CWDM/DWDM ONS Node Mux only with G-Series Cards with CWDM/DWDM GBICs QAM CWDM/DWDM Demux only 90954 VoD = Lambdas 5.13.4 SFP Description SFPs are integrated fiber-optic transceivers that provide high-speed serial links from a port or slot to the network. Various latching mechanisms can be utilized on the SFP modules.
Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards 5.13 5.13.4 SFP Description Actuator/Button SFP Figure 5-17 Bail Clasp SFP 63067 63066 Figure 5-16 Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.
CH A P T E R 6 Storage Access Networking Cards Note The terms "Unidirectional Path Switched Ring" and "UPSR" may appear in Cisco literature. These terms do not refer to using Cisco ONS 15xxx products in a unidirectional path switched ring configuration. Rather, these terms, as well as "Path Protected Mesh Network" and "PPMN," refer generally to Cisco's path protection feature, which may be used in any topological network configuration.
Chapter 6 Storage Access Networking Cards 6.1 6.1 FC_MR-4 Card Overview – Dual rate (1G/2G): MM (550 m) and SM (10 km) – Single rate (1G): SX (550 m) and LX (10 km) • SONET/SDH support – Four 1.0625-Gbps FC channels can be mapped into one of the following: SONET containers as small as STS1-1v (subrate) SDH containers as small as VC4-1v (subrate) SONET/SDH containers as small as STS-18c/VC4-6v (full rate) – Four 2.
Chapter 6 Storage Access Networking Cards 6.1 6.1.1 FC_MR-4 Card-Level Indicators Figure 6-1 FC_MR-4 Faceplate and Block Diagram FC_MR-4 FAIL ACT FLASH SDRAM MPC8250 Decode and Control PLD GBIC OPTICS Rx 1 Tx ACT/LNK Rx 2 GBIC OPTICS SERDES GBIC OPTICS Tx RUDRA FPGA TADM BTC 192 IBPIA ACT/LNK CDR + SONET FRAMER GBIC OPTICS Rx 3 Tx ACT/LNK Rx 4 Tx QDR MEMORY QUICKSILVER VCAT PROCESSOR IBPIA B A C K P L A N E DDR MEMORY 110595 ACT/LNK 6.1.
Chapter 6 Storage Access Networking Cards 6.2 6.1.2 FC_MR-4 Port-Level Indicators 6.1.2 FC_MR-4 Port-Level Indicators Each FC_MR-4 port has a corresponding ACT/LNK LED. The ACT/LNK LED is solid green if the port is available to carry traffic, is provisioned as in-service, and is in the active mode. The ACT/LNK LED is flashing green if the port is carrying traffic.
Chapter 6 Storage Access Networking Cards 6.2 6.2.2 Enhanced Card Mode – STS-1-Xv where X is 37 to 48 – STS-3c-Xv where X is 12 to 16 – VC4-Xv where X is 12 to 16 6.2.2 Enhanced Card Mode The features available in enhanced card mode are given in this section. 6.2.2.
Chapter 6 Storage Access Networking Cards 6.2 6.2.
Chapter 6 Storage Access Networking Cards 6.3 6.2.4 Link Recovery • Data port disabled if SONET/SDH transport is errored 6.2.
Chapter 6 Storage Access Networking Cards 6.4 6.4 FC_MR-4 Card GBICs The FC_MR-4 payloads can be transported over the following circuit types: Note • STS • STSn • STS-V Virtual Tributary (VT) and VT-V circuits are not supported. The FC_MR-4 card supports VCAT. See the “11.17 Virtual Concatenated Circuits” section on page 11-33 for more information about VCAT circuits. 6.4 FC_MR-4 Card GBICs The FC_MR-4 uses pluggable GBICs for client interfaces.
CH A P T E R 7 Card Protection This chapter explains the Cisco ONS 15454 card protection configurations. To provision card protection, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide. Chapter topics include: • 7.1 Electrical Card Protection, page 7-1 • 7.2 Electrical Card Protection and the Backplane, page 7-5 • 7.3 OC-N Card Protection, page 7-13 • 7.4 Unprotected Cards, page 7-14 • 7.5 External Switching Commands, page 7-14 7.
Chapter 7 Card Protection 7.1 7.1.1 1:1 Protection 7.1.1 1:1 Protection In 1:1 protection, a working card is paired with a protect card of the same type. If the working card fails, the traffic from the working card switches to the protect card. You can provision 1:1 to be revertive or nonrevertive. If revertive, traffic automatically reverts to the working card after the failure on the working card is resolved.
Chapter 7 Card Protection 7.1 7.1.2 1:N Protection Figure 7-2 Example: ONS 15454 Cards in a 1:N Protection Configuration (SMB EIA) 1:N Protection 32106 Working Working 1:N Protection Working Working Working TCC+ XC10G AIC (Optional) XC10G TCC+ Working Working Working 1:N Protection Working Working Table 7-1 provides the supported 1:N configurations by electrical card, as well as the card types that can be used for working and protection cards.
Chapter 7 Card Protection 7.1 7.1.2 1:N Protection 3. A high-density electrical card inserted in Slot 16 restricts the use of Slot 14 to optical, data, or storage cards. 4. A high-density electrical card inserted in Slot 17 restricts the use of Slots 12 and 13 to optical, data, or storage cards. 5. A high-density electrical card inserted in Slot 1 restricts the use of Slots 5 and 6 to optical, data, or storage cards. 6.
Chapter 7 Card Protection 7.2 7.2 Electrical Card Protection and the Backplane 7.2 Electrical Card Protection and the Backplane Protection schemes for electrical cards depend on the EIA type used on the ONS 15454 backplane. The difference is due to the varying connector size. For example, because BNC connectors are larger, fewer DS3-12 cards can be supported when using a BNC connector. Table 7-2 shows the number of connectors per side for each EIA type according to low-density and high-density interfaces.
Chapter 7 Card Protection 7.2 7.
Working Working Working Working Working Working Working Working Working TCC Working Cross-connect Cross-connect AIC TCC Working Working Working Working Working Working Working Working Working TCC Working Working Cross-connect Cross-connect AIC TCC Working Working Working Working Working Working Working TCC Cross-connect Cross-connect AIC TCC Working Working High-Density BNC Standard BNC MiniBNC SMB/UBIC/AMP Champ Working Working TCC Cross-connect AIC Cross-connect TCC W
Chapter 7 Card Protection 7.2 7.2 Electrical Card Protection and the Backplane Figure 7-4 shows unprotected high-density electrical card schemes by EIA type. Figure 7-4 Unprotected High-Density Electrical Card Schemes for EIA Types 124963 Working Working TCC Cross-connect AIC Cross-connect TCC Working Working UBIC/MiniBNC Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.
Chapter 7 Card Protection 7.2 7.2 Electrical Card Protection and the Backplane Figure 7-5 shows 1:1 low-density card protection by EIA type.
Chapter 7 Card Protection 7.2 7.2 Electrical Card Protection and the Backplane Figure 7-6 shows 1:N protection for low-density electrical cards.
Chapter 7 Card Protection 7.2 7.2.1 Standard BNC Protection Figure 7-7 shows 1:1 high-density card protection by EIA type. Figure 7-7 1:1 Protection Schemes for High-Density Electrical Cards with UBIC or MiniBNC EIA Types 124964 Working Working Protect TCC Cross-connect AIC Cross-connect TCC Protect Working Working UBIC/MiniBNC 7.2.
Chapter 7 Card Protection 7.2 7.2.3 MiniBNC Protection 7.2.3 MiniBNC Protection When used with the MiniBNC EIA, the ONS 15454 supports unprotected, 1:1, or 1:N (N < 5) electrical card protection for DS-1, DS-3 and EC-1 signals, as outlined in Table 7-1 on page 7-3 and Table 7-1 on page 7-3.
Chapter 7 Card Protection 7.3 7.3 OC-N Card Protection 7.3 OC-N Card Protection The ONS 15454 provides two optical card protection methods, 1+1 protection and optimized 1+1 protection. This section covers the general concept of optical card protection. Specific optical card protection schemes depend on the optical cards in use. 7.3.1 1+1 Protection Any OC-N card can use 1+1 protection.
Chapter 7 Card Protection 7.4 7.4 Unprotected Cards installed side by side in the node. A working card must be paired with a protect card of the same type and number of ports. For example, a four-port OC-3 must be paired with another four-port OC-3, and an eight-port OC-3 must be paired with another eight-port OC-3. You cannot create an optimized 1+1 protection group if the number of ports do not match, even if the OC-N rates are the same.
Chapter 7 Card Protection 7.5 7.5 External Switching Commands A Force switch has a higher priority than a Manual switch. Lockouts, which prevent traffic from switching to the protect port under any circumstance, can only be applied to protect cards (in 1+1 configurations). Lockouts have the highest priority. In a 1+1 configuration you can also apply a lock on to the working port. A working port with a lock on applied cannot switch traffic to the protect port in the protection group (pair).
Chapter 7 Card Protection 7.5 7.5 External Switching Commands Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.
CH A P T E R 8 Cisco Transport Controller Operation This chapter describes Cisco Transport Controller (CTC), the software interface for the Cisco ONS 15454. For CTC set up and login information, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide. Chapter topics include: • 8.1 CTC Software Delivery Methods, page 8-1 • 8.2 CTC Installation Overview, page 8-3 • 8.3 PC and UNIX Workstation Requirements, page 8-4 • 8.4 ONS 15454 Connection, page 8-6 • 8.5 CTC Window, page 8-7 • 8.
Chapter 8 Cisco Transport Controller Operation 8.1 8.1.1 CTC Software Installed on the TCC2/TCC2P Card Figure 8-1 CTC Software Versions, Node View Maintenance tab 96942 Software tab Select the Maintenance > Software tabs in network view to display the software versions installed on all the network nodes (Figure 8-2). Figure 8-2 CTC Software Versions, Network View 96940 Maintenance tab Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.
Chapter 8 Cisco Transport Controller Operation 8.2 8.1.2 CTC Software Installed on the PC or UNIX Workstation 8.1.2 CTC Software Installed on the PC or UNIX Workstation CTC software is downloaded from the TCC2/TCC2P cards and installed on your computer automatically after you connect to the ONS 15454 with a new software release for the first time. Downloading the CTC software files automatically ensures that your computer is running the same CTC software version as the TCC2/TCC2P cards you are accessing.
Chapter 8 Cisco Transport Controller Operation 8.3 8.3 PC and UNIX Workstation Requirements 8.3 PC and UNIX Workstation Requirements To use CTC for the ONS 15454, your computer must have a web browser with the correct Java Runtime Environment (JRE) installed. The correct JRE for each CTC software release is included on the Cisco ONS 15454 software CD. If you are running multiple CTC software releases on a network, the JRE installed on the computer must be compatible with the different software releases.
Chapter 8 Cisco Transport Controller Operation 8.3 8.3 PC and UNIX Workstation Requirements Table 8-2 Computer Requirements for CTC Area Requirements Notes Processor (PC only) Pentium 4 processor or equivalent A faster CPU is recommended if your workstation runs multiple applications or if CTC manages a network with a large number of nodes and circuits.
Chapter 8 Cisco Transport Controller Operation 8.4 8.4 ONS 15454 Connection Table 8-2 Computer Requirements for CTC (continued) Area Requirements Web browser Notes PC: Internet Explorer 6.x, Netscape 7.x For the PC, use JRE 1.4.2 or JRE 5.0 with any supported web browser. Cisco • UNIX Workstation: Mozilla 1.7 on recommends Internet Explorer 6.x. For Solaris 8 and 9, Netscape 4.76, UNIX, use JRE 5.0 with Netscape 7.x Netscape 7.x or JRE 1.3.1_02 with Netscape 4.76. • Netscape 4.76 or 7.
Chapter 8 Cisco Transport Controller Operation 8.5 8.
Chapter 8 Cisco Transport Controller Operation 8.5 8.5.1 Node View Figure 8-3 Node View (Default Login View) Menu bar Tool bar Status area Top pane Graphic area Tabs Subtabs 96941 Bottom pane Status bar 8.5.1 Node View Node view, shown in Figure 8-3, is the first view that appears after you log into an ONS 15454. The login node is the first node shown, and it is the “home view” for the session. Node view allows you to manage one ONS 15454 node.
Chapter 8 Cisco Transport Controller Operation 8.5 8.5.1 Node View Table 8-5 Node View Card Statuses Card Status Description Sby Card is in standby mode. Act Card is active. NP Card is not present. Ldg Card is resetting. Mis Card is mismatched. The port color in both card and node view indicates the port service state. Table 8-6 lists the port colors and their service states. For more information about port service states, see Appendix B, “Administrative and Service States.
Chapter 8 Cisco Transport Controller Operation 8.5 8.5.1 Node View Table 8-6 Node View Card Port Colors and Service States (continued) Port Color Service State Description Green IS-NR (In-Service and Normal) The port is fully operational and performing as provisioned. The port transmits a signal and displays alarms; loopbacks are not allowed. Violet OOS-AU,AINS (Out-of-Service and Autonomous, Automatic In-Service) The port is out-of-service, but traffic is carried.
Chapter 8 Cisco Transport Controller Operation 8.5 8.5.2 Network View Table 8-7 Node View Tabs and Subtabs (continued) Tab Description History Provides a history of node alarms including date, Session, Node type, and severity of each alarm. The Session subtab displays alarms and events for the current session. The Node subtab displays alarms and events retrieved from a fixed-size log on the node. Circuits Creates, deletes, edits, and maps circuits and rolls.
Chapter 8 Cisco Transport Controller Operation 8.5 8.5.2 Network View Figure 8-6 Network in CTC Network View Icon color indicates node status Dots indicate selected node 96939 Bold letters indicate login node, asterisk indicates topology host Note Nodes with DCC connections to the login node do not appear if you checked the Disable Network Discovery check box in the Login dialog box. The graphic area displays a background image with colored ONS 15454 icons.
Chapter 8 Cisco Transport Controller Operation 8.5 8.5.2 Network View Table 8-8 Network View Tabs and Subtabs (continued) Tab Description Provisioning Provisions security, alarm profiles, Security, Alarm Profiles, BLSR, bidirectional line switched rings (BLSRs), and Overhead Circuits, Provisionable overhead circuits.
Chapter 8 Cisco Transport Controller Operation 8.5 8.5.3 Card View Table 8-11 Icon Link Icons Description DCC icon GCC icon OTS icon PPC icon Server Trail icon Note Link consolidation is only available on non-detailed maps. Non-detailed maps display nodes in icon form instead of detailed form, meaning the nodes appear as rectangles with ports on the sides. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide for more information about consolidated links. 8.5.
Chapter 8 Cisco Transport Controller Operation 8.5 8.5.3 Card View Figure 8-7 CTC Card View Showing a DS1 Card 96938 Card identification and status Note CTC provides a card view for all ONS 15454 cards except the TCC2, TCC2P, XCVT, XC10G, and XC-VXC-10G cards. Provisioning for these common control cards occurs at the node view; therefore, no card view is necessary. Use the card view tabs and subtabs shown in Table 8-12 to provision and manage the ONS 15454.
Chapter 8 Cisco Transport Controller Operation 8.5 8.5.4 Print or Export CTC Data Table 8-12 Card View Tabs and Subtabs (continued) Tab Description Subtabs Provisioning Provisions an ONS 15454 card.
Chapter 8 Cisco Transport Controller Operation 8.6 8.6 TCC2/TCC2P Card Reset Whether you choose to print or export data, you can choose from the following options: • Entire frame—Prints or exports the entire CTC window including the graphical view of the card, node, or network. This option is available for all windows. • Tabbed view—Prints or exports the lower half of the CTC window containing tabs and data. The printout includes the selected tab (on top) and the data shown in the tab window.
Chapter 8 Cisco Transport Controller Operation 8.8 8.8 Software Revert Note To avoid a node IP and secure IP ending up in the same domain after restoring a database, ensure that the node IP stored in the database differs in domain from that of the node in repeater mode. Also, after restoring a database, ensure that the node IP and secure IP differ in domain. 8.
CH A P T E R 9 Security This chapter provides information about Cisco ONS 15454 users and security. To provision security, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide. Chapter topics include: • 9.1 User IDs and Security Levels, page 9-1 • 9.2 User Privileges and Policies, page 9-1 • 9.3 Audit Trail, page 9-7 • 9.4 RADIUS Security, page 9-8 9.
Chapter 9 Security 9.2 9.2.1 User Privileges by CTC Action 9.2.1 User Privileges by CTC Action Table 9-1 shows the actions that each user privilege level can perform in node view.
Chapter 9 Security 9.2 9.2.
Chapter 9 Security 9.2 9.2.
Chapter 9 Security 9.2 9.2.1 User Privileges by CTC Action 1. The X symbol indicates that the user can perform the actions. 2. The — symbol indicates that the privilege to perform an action is not available to the user. 3. Provisioner user cannot change node name, contact, or AIS-V insertion on STS-1 signal degrade (SD) parameters. 4. The action buttons in the subtab are active for all users, but the actions can be completely performed only by the users with the required security levels.
Chapter 9 Security 9.2 9.2.2 Security Policies 9.2.2 Security Policies Users with Superuser security privileges can provision security policies on the ONS 15454. These security policies include idle user timeouts, password changes, password aging, and user lockout parameters. In addition, a Superuser can access the ONS 15454 through the TCC2/TCC2P RJ-45 port, the backplane LAN connection, or both. 9.2.2.
Chapter 9 Security 9.3 9.3 Audit Trail Note The superuser cannot modify the privilege level of an active user. The CTC displays a warning message when the superuser attempts to modify the privilege level of an active user. 9.3 Audit Trail The Cisco ONS 15454 maintains a Telcordia GR-839-CORE-compliant audit trail log that resides on the TCC2/TCC2P card. Audit trails are useful for maintaining security, recovering lost transactions, and enforcing accountability.
Chapter 9 Security 9.4 9.3.2 Audit Trail Capacities • Status—Status of the user action (Read, Initial, Successful, Timeout, Failed) • Time—Time of change • Message Type—Whether the event is Success/Failure type • Message Details—Description of the change 9.3.2 Audit Trail Capacities The ONS 15454 is able to store 640 log entries. When this limit is reached, the oldest entries are overwritten with new events.
Chapter 9 Security 9.4 9.4.2 Shared Secrets 9.4.2 Shared Secrets A shared secret is a text string that serves as a password between: • A RADIUS client and RADIUS server • A RADIUS client and a RADIUS proxy • A RADIUS proxy and a RADIUS server For a configuration that uses a RADIUS client, a RADIUS proxy, and a RADIUS server, the shared secret that is used between the RADIUS client and the RADIUS proxy can be different from the shared secret used between the RADIUS proxy and the RADIUS server.
Chapter 9 Security 9.4 9.4.2 Shared Secrets Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.
CH A P T E R 10 Timing This chapter provides information about Cisco ONS 15454 SONET timing. To provision timing, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide. Chapter topics include: • 10.1 Timing Parameters, page 10-1 • 10.2 Network Timing, page 10-2 • 10.3 Synchronization Status Messaging, page 10-3 10.1 Timing Parameters SONET timing parameters must be set for each ONS 15454.
Chapter 10 Timing 10.2 10.2 Network Timing Caution Note Mixed timing allows you to select both external and line timing sources. However, Cisco does not recommend its use because it can create timing loops. Use this mode with caution. Only one port can be used for timing related provisioning per line card on the Cisco ONS 15454 platform. 10.2 Network Timing Figure 10-1 shows an ONS 15454 network timing setup example. Node 1 is set to external timing. Two timing references are set to BITS.
Chapter 10 Timing 10.3 10.
Chapter 10 Timing 10.3 10.
CH A P T E R 11 Circuits and Tunnels Note The terms "Unidirectional Path Switched Ring" and "UPSR" may appear in Cisco literature. These terms do not refer to using Cisco ONS 15xxx products in a unidirectional path switched ring configuration. Rather, these terms, as well as "Path Protected Mesh Network" and "PPMN," refer generally to Cisco's path protection feature, which may be used in any topological network configuration.
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels 11.1 11.1 Overview • 11.20 Reconfigured Circuits, page 11-43 • 11.21 VLAN Management, page 11-44 • 11.22 Server Trails, page 11-44 11.1 Overview You can create circuits across and within ONS 15454 nodes and assign different attributes to circuits. For example, you can: • Create one-way, two-way (bidirectional), or broadcast circuits. • Assign user-defined names to circuits. • Assign different circuit sizes. • Automatically or manually route circuits.
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels 11.2 11.2 Circuit Properties the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Installation and Operations Guide). VCAT circuits are VT1.5-nv, STS-1-nv, STS-3c-nv, and STS-12c-nv, where n is the number of members. For time slot availability on concatenated STSs, see the “11.2.1 Concatenated STS Time Slot Assignments” section on page 11-4. • OCHNC Wlen—For OCHNCs, the wavelength provisioned for the optical channel network connection.
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels 11.2 11.2.1 Concatenated STS Time Slot Assignments Figure 11-1 ONS 15454 Circuit Window in Network View 11.2.1 Concatenated STS Time Slot Assignments Table 11-1 shows the available time slot assignments for concatenated STSs when using CTC to provision circuits.
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels 11.2 11.2.
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels 11.2 11.2.
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels 11.2 11.2.3 Circuit States Table 11-2 ONS 15454 Circuit Status (continued) Status Definition/Activity PARTIAL A CTC-created circuit is missing a cross-connect or network span, a complete path from source to destinations does not exist, or an alarm interface panel (AIP) change occurred on one of the circuit nodes and the circuit is in need of repair. (AIPs store the node MAC address.) In CTC, circuits are represented using cross-connects and network spans.
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels 11.2 11.2.3 Circuit States • If all cross-connects in a circuit are in an Out-of-Service (OOS) service state, such as Out-of-Service and Management, Maintenance (OOS-MA,MT); Out-of-Service and Management, Disabled (OOS-MA,DSBLD); or Out-of-Service and Autonomous, Automatic In-Service (OOS-AU,AINS) service state, the circuit service state is Out-of-Service (OOS).
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels 11.2 11.2.4 Circuit Protection Types To find the remaining port soak time, choose the Maintenance > AINS Soak tabs in card view and click the Retrieve button. If the port is in the OOS-AU,AINS state and has a good signal, the Time Until IS column shows the soak count down status. If the port is OOS-AU,AINS and has a bad signal, the Time Until IS column indicates that the signal is bad. You must click the Retrieve button to obtain the latest time value.
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels 11.2 11.2.5 Circuit Information in the Edit Circuit Window 11.2.5 Circuit Information in the Edit Circuit Window You can edit a selected circuit using the Edit button on the Circuits window. The tabs that appear depend on the circuit chosen: • General—Displays general circuit information and allows you to edit the circuit name. • Drops—Allows you to add a drop to a unidirectional circuit. For more information, see the “11.
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels 11.2 11.2.5 Circuit Information in the Edit Circuit Window By default, the working path is indicated by a green, bidirectional arrow, and the protect path is indicated by a purple, bidirectional arrow. Source and destination ports are shown as circles with an S and D. Port states are indicated by colors, shown in Table 11-4.
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels 11.3 11.3 Cross-Connect Card Bandwidth Figure 11-2 BLSR Circuit Displayed on the Detailed Circuit Map 11.3 Cross-Connect Card Bandwidth The ONS 15454 XCVT, XC10G, and XC-VXC-10G cross-connect cards perform port-to-port, time-division multiplexing (TDM). XCVT, XC10G, and XC-VXC-10G cards perform STS, VT2 (XC-VXC-10G only), and VT1.5 multiplexing.
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels 11.3 11.3 Cross-Connect Card Bandwidth For example, if you create a VT1.5 circuit from an STS-1 on a drop card, two VT matrix STS ports are used, as shown in Figure 11-3. If you create a second VT1.5 circuit from the same STS port on the drop card, no additional logical STS ports are used on the VT matrix. In fact, you can create up to 28 VT1.5 circuits using the same STS-1 port. However, if the next VT1.
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels 11.3 11.3 Cross-Connect Card Bandwidth Figure 11-4 Two VT1.5 Circuits in a BLSR VT1.5 circuit #1 on STS-1 1 VT1.5 used on STS-1 27 VT1.5s available on STS-1 XCVT/XC10G Matrices Source STS Matrix Drop EC-1 4 STSs total used 20 STSs available OC-12 VT1.5 Matrix VT1.5 circuit #2 on STS-2 1 VT1.5 used on STS-2 27 VT1.5s available on STS-2 VT1.5 circuit #1 on STS-1 1 VT1.5 used on STS-1 27 VT1.
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels 11.4 11.4 Portless Transmux Table 11-5 VT Matrix Port Usage for One VT1.5 Circuit Node Type No Protection BLSR Path Protection 1+1 Circuit source or destination node 2 2 3 2 Circuit pass-through node without VT tunnel 2 2 2 2 Circuit pass-through node with VT tunnel 0 0 0 0 Cross-connect card resources can be viewed on the Maintenance > Cross-Connect > Resource Usage tab. This tab shows: • STS-1 Matrix—The percent of STS matrix resources that are used.
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels 11.5 11.5 DCC Tunnels Table 11-6 Portless Transmux Mapping for XCVT Drop Ports Physical Port Portless Port Pair 1, 2 13, 14 3, 4 15, 16 5, 6 17, 18 7, 8 19, 20 9, 10 21, 22 11, 12 23, 24 Table 11-7 lists the portless transmux for XCVT trunk ports and for XC10G or XC-VXC-10G any-slot ports.
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels 11.5 11.5.1 Traditional DCC Tunnels 11.5.1 Traditional DCC Tunnels In traditional DCC tunnels, you can use the three LDCCs and the SDCC (when not used for ONS 15454 DCC terminations). A traditional DCC tunnel endpoint is defined by slot, port, and DCC, where DCC can be either the SDCC or one of the LDCCs. You can link LDCCs to LDCCs and link SDCCs to SDCCs. You can also link an SDCC to an LDCC, and an LDCC to an SDCC.
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels 11.6 11.5.2 IP-Encapsulated Tunnels • A SDCC that is terminated cannot be used as a DCC tunnel endpoint. • A SDCC that is used as an DCC tunnel endpoint cannot be terminated. • All DCC tunnel connections are bidirectional. 11.5.2 IP-Encapsulated Tunnels An IP-encapsulated tunnel puts an SDCC in an IP packet at a source node and dynamically routes the packet to a destination node.
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels 11.8 11.8 Monitor Circuits 11.8 Monitor Circuits Monitor circuits are secondary circuits that monitor traffic on primary bidirectional circuits. Figure 11-6 shows an example of a monitor circuit. At Node 1, a VT1.5 is dropped from Port 1 of an EC1-12 card. To monitor the VT1.5 traffic, plug test equipment into Port 2 of the EC1-12 card and provision a monitor circuit to Port 2. Circuit monitors are one-way. The monitor circuit in Figure 11-6 monitors VT1.
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels 11.9 11.9.1 Open-Ended Path Protection Circuits Figure 11-7 Editing Path Protection Selectors 11.9.1 Open-Ended Path Protection Circuits If ONS 15454s are connected to a third-party network, you can create an open-ended path protection circuit to route a circuit through it. To do this, you create four circuits. One circuit is created on the source ONS 15454 network.
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels 11.10 11.10 BLSR Protection Channel Access Circuits Figure 11-8 Path Protection Go-and-Return Routing Node A Any network Any network Go and Return working connection Go and Return protecting connection 96953 Node B 11.10 BLSR Protection Channel Access Circuits You can provision circuits to carry traffic on BLSR protection channels when conditions are fault-free.
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels 11.11 11.11 BLSR STS and VT Squelch Tables 11.11 BLSR STS and VT Squelch Tables ONS 15454 nodes display STS and VT squelch tables depending on the type of circuits created. For example, if a fiber cut occurs, the BLSR squelch tables show STSs or VTs that will be squelched for every isolated node. Squelching replaces traffic by inserting the appropriate alarm indication signal path (AIS-P) and prevents traffic misconnections.
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels 11.12 11.12 Section and Path Trace When using a VT circuit on a VT tunnel (VTT), the VTT allows multiple VT circuits to be passed through on a single STS without consuming VT matrix resources on the cross-connect card. Both endpoints of the VTT are the source and destination nodes for the VTT. The node carrying VT circuits through a VTT is called a VT-access node.
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels 11.13 11.13 Path Signal Label, C2 Byte Table 11-9 ONS 15454 Cards Capable of J1 Path Trace J1 Function Cards Transmit and Receive CE-Series DS1-141 DS1N-14 DS1/EC1-56 DS3-12E DS3i-N-12 DS3/EC1-48 DS3N-12E DS3XM-6 DS3XM-12 FC_MR-4 G-Series ML-Series Receive Only EC1-12 OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310 OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310-8 OC12/STM4-4 OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 OC192 IR/STM SH 1550 OC192-XFP 1.
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels 11.13 11.13 Path Signal Label, C2 Byte (LLC)/Subnetwork Access Protocol (SNAP) header fields on an Ethernet network; it allows a single interface to transport multiple payload types simultaneously. C2 byte hex values are provided in Table 11-10.
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels 11.14 11.
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels 11.14 11.14.1 Bandwidth Allocation and Routing • Circuit routing does not use links that are down. If you want all links to be considered for routing, do not create circuits when a link is down. • Circuit routing computes the shortest path when you add a new drop to an existing circuit. It tries to find the shortest path from the new drop to any nodes on the existing circuit.
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels 11.15 11.15 Manual Circuit Routing Several rules apply to secondary sources and destinations: • CTC does not allow a secondary destination for unidirectional circuits because you can always specify additional destinations after you create the circuit. • The sources and destinations cannot be DS-3, DS3XM, or DS-1-based STS-1s or VT1.5s. • Secondary sources and destinations are permitted only for regular STS/VT1.
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels 11.15 11.
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels 11.15 11.15 Manual Circuit Routing Figure 11-12 Ethernet Shared Packet Ring Routing Ethernet source Node 1 Node 2 Node 3 Node 4 55405 Ethernet destination • Multicard EtherSwitch circuits can have virtual path protection segments if the source or destination is not in the path protection domain.
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels 11.15 11.
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels 11.16 11.16 Constraint-Based Circuit Routing Table 11-15 Bidirectional VT Tunnels (continued) Connection Type Number of Inbound Links Number of Outbound Links Number of Sources Number of Destinations 1 — — — — — At Source Nodes Only VT tunnel endpoint — At Destination Nodes Only VT tunnel endpoint 1 Although virtual path protection segments are possible in VT tunnels, VT tunnels are still considered unprotected.
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels 11.17 11.17 Virtual Concatenated Circuits 11.17 Virtual Concatenated Circuits Virtual concatenated (VCAT) circuits, also called VCAT groups (VCGs), transport traffic using noncontiguous TDM time slots, avoiding the bandwidth fragmentation problem that exists with contiguous concatenated (CCAT) circuits. The cards that support VCAT circuits are the CE-Series, FC_MR-4 (both line rate and enhanced mode), and ML-Series cards.
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels 11.17 11.17.
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels 11.17 11.17.3 Link Capacity Adjustment 11.17.3 Link Capacity Adjustment The CE-100T-8 card supports the link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS), which is a signaling protocol that allows dynamic bandwidth adjustment of VCAT circuits. When a member fails, a brief traffic hit occurs. LCAS temporarily removes the failed member from the VCAT circuit for the duration of the failure, leaving the remaining members to carry the traffic.
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels 11.17 11.17.4 VCAT Circuit Size Table 11-16 ONS 15454 Card VCAT Circuit Rates and Members (continued) Card Circuit Rate Number of Members FC_MR-4 (line rate mode) STS-1 24 (1 Gbps port) 48 (2 Gbps port) STS-3c 8 (1 Gbps port) 16 (2 Gbps port) FC_MR-4 (enhanced mode) STS-1 1–24 (1 Gbps port) 1–48 (2 Gbps port) STS-3c 1–8 (1 Gbps port) 1–16 (2 Gbps port) ML-Series STS-1, STS-3c, STS-12c 2 1.
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels 11.18 11.18 Bridge and Roll Table 11-17 ONS 15454 VCAT Card Capabilities (continued) Card Mode Add a Member Delete a Member Support OOS-MA,OOG CE-1000-4 LCAS No No No SW-LCAS Yes Yes Yes Non-LCAS Yes2 Yes2 No SW-LCAS Yes Yes Yes Non-LCAS No No No FC_MR-4 (line mode) Non-LCAS No No No ML-Series SW-LCAS No No No Non-LCAS No No No FC_MR-4 (enhanced mode) 1.
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels 11.18 11.18.1 Rolls Window Figure 11-16 Rolls Window The Rolls window information includes: • Roll From Circuit—The circuit that has connections that will no longer be used when the roll process is complete. • Roll To Circuit—The circuit that will carry the traffic after the roll process is complete. The Roll To Circuit is the same as the Roll From Circuit if a single circuit is involved in a roll. • Roll State—The roll status; see the “11.18.
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels 11.18 11.18.2 Roll Status • Roll From Circuit—The circuit that has connections that will no longer be used when the process is complete. • Roll From Path— The old path that is being rerouted. • Roll To Path—The new path where the Roll From Path is rerouted. • Complete—Completes a manual roll after a valid signal is received. You can do this when a manual roll is in a ROLL_PENDING status and you have not yet completed the roll or have not cancelled its sibling roll.
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels 11.18 11.18.3 Single and Dual Rolls Note You can only reroute circuits in the DISCOVERED status. You cannot reroute circuits that are in the ROLL_PENDING status. 11.18.3 Single and Dual Rolls Circuits have an additional layer of roll types: single and dual. A single roll on a circuit is a roll on one of its cross-connects. Use a single roll to: • Change either the source or destination of a selected circuit (Figure 11-17 and Figure 11-18, respectively).
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels 11.18 11.18.3 Single and Dual Rolls S Single Roll from One Circuit to Another Circuit (Destination Changes) Node 1 Node 2 D Node 3 Node 4 D2 78703 Figure 11-19 Original leg New leg Figure 11-20 shows one circuit rolling onto another circuit at the source.
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels 11.19 11.18.4 Two Circuit Bridge and Roll S Dual Roll to Reroute to a Different Node Node 1 Node 2 Node 3 Node 4 Original leg New leg Note D 83102 Figure 11-22 If a new segment is created on Nodes 3 and 4 using the Bridge and Roll wizard, the created circuit has the same name as the original circuit with the suffix _ROLL**. The circuit source is on Node 3 and the circuit destination is on Node 4. 11.18.
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels 11.20 11.20 Reconfigured Circuits • Circuits types must be a compatible. For example, you can combine an STS circuit with a VAP circuit to create a longer VAP circuit, but you cannot combine a VT circuit with an STS circuit. • Circuit directions must be compatible. You can merge a one-way and a two-way circuit, but not two one-way circuits in opposing directions. • Circuit sizes must be identical. • VLAN assignments must be identical.
Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels 11.21 11.21 VLAN Management 11.21 VLAN Management In Software Release 4.6 and later, VLANs are populated within topologies to limit broadcasts to each topology rather than to the entire network. Using the Manage VLANs command in the Tools menu, you can view a list of topology hosts and provisioned VLANs. You create VLANs during circuit creation or with the Manage VLANs command.
CH A P T E R 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades Note The terms "Unidirectional Path Switched Ring" and "UPSR" may appear in Cisco literature. These terms do not refer to using Cisco ONS 15xxx products in a unidirectional path switched ring configuration. Rather, these terms, as well as "Path Protected Mesh Network" and "PPMN," refer generally to Cisco's path protection feature, which may be used in any topological network configuration.
Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades 12.2 12.2 Bidirectional Line Switched Rings Table 12-1 ONS 15454 Rings with Redundant TCC2/TCC2P Cards (continued) Ring Type Maximum Rings per Node UPSR with SDCC 341 UPSR with LDCC 142 UPSR with LDCC and SDCC 263 1. Total SDCC usage must be equal to or less than 84 SDCCs. 2. Total LDCC usage must be equal to or less than 28 LDCCs. 3. Total LDCC and SDCC usage must be equal to or less than 84.
Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades 12.2 12.2.1 Two-Fiber BLSRs Figure 12-1 Four-Node, Two-Fiber BLSR STSs 1-24 (working) STSs 25-48 (protect) Node 0 STSs 1-24 (working) STSs 25-48 (protect) OC-48 Ring Node 1 = Fiber 1 Node 2 = Fiber 2 61938 Node 3 The SONET K1, K2, and K3 bytes carry the information that governs BLSR protection switches. Each BLSR node monitors the K bytes to determine when to switch the SONET signal to an alternate physical path.
Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades 12.2 12.2.1 Two-Fiber BLSRs Figure 12-2 Four-Node, Two-Fiber BLSR Traffic Pattern Sample Node 0 Node 3 OC-48 Ring Node 1 Node 2 Fiber 2 61956 Traffic flow Fiber 1 Figure 12-3 shows how traffic is rerouted following a line break between Node 0 and Node 3. • All circuits originating on Node 0 that carried traffic to Node 2 on Fiber 2 are switched to the protect bandwidth of Fiber 1.
Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades 12.2 12.2.2 Four-Fiber BLSRs Figure 12-3 Four-Node, Two-Fiber BLSR Traffic Pattern Following Line Break Node 0 Node 3 OC-48 Ring Node 1 Fiber 1 Node 2 Fiber 2 61957 Traffic flow 12.2.2 Four-Fiber BLSRs Four-fiber BLSRs double the bandwidth of two-fiber BLSRs. Because they allow span switching as well as ring switching, four-fiber BLSRs increase the reliability and flexibility of traffic protection.
Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades 12.2 12.2.2 Four-Fiber BLSRs Figure 12-4 Four-Node, Four-Fiber BLSR Node 0 Span 4 Span 1 Span 5 Node 1 OC-48 Ring Span 6 Span 7 Span 3 Span 2 = Working fibers Node 2 = Protect fibers 61932 Node 3 Span 8 Four-fiber BLSRs provide span and ring switching: • Span switching (Figure 12-5 on page 12-7) occurs when a working span fails.
Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades 12.2 12.2.2 Four-Fiber BLSRs Figure 12-5 Four-Fiber BLSR Span Switch Node 0 Span 4 Span 1 Span 5 Node 1 OC-48 Ring Span 6 Span 7 Span 3 Span 2 = Working fibers Node 2 • = Protect fibers 61959 Node 3 Span 8 Ring switching (Figure 12-6) occurs when a span switch cannot recover traffic, such as when both the working and protect fibers fail on the same span. In a ring switch, traffic is routed to the protect fibers throughout the full ring.
Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades 12.2 12.2.3 BLSR Bandwidth Figure 12-6 Four-Fiber BLSR Ring Switch Node 0 Span 4 Span 1 Span 5 Node 1 OC-48 Ring Span 6 Span 7 Span 3 Span 2 = Working fibers Node 2 = Protect fibers 61960 Node 3 Span 8 12.2.3 BLSR Bandwidth BLSR nodes can terminate traffic coming from either side of the ring. Therefore, BLSRs are suited for distributed node-to-node traffic applications such as interoffice networks and access networks.
Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades 12.2 12.2.4 BLSR Application Example Table 12-3 Four-Fiber BLSR Capacity OC Rate Working Bandwidth Protection Bandwidth Ring Capacity OC-48 STS 1-48 (Fiber 1) STS 1-48 (Fiber 2) 48 x N1 – PT2 OC-192 STS 1-192 (Fiber 1) STS 1-192 (Fiber 2) 192 x N – PT 1. N equals the number of ONS 15454 nodes configured as BLSR nodes. 2.
Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades 12.2 12.2.4 BLSR Application Example • The ONS 15454 OC-3 card supports a total of four OC-3 ports so that two additional OC-3 spans can be added at little cost.
Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades 12.2 12.2.4 BLSR Application Example Figure 12-9 Shelf Assembly Layout for Node 0 in Figure 12-8 134608 DS3-12 DS3-12 OC3 OC3 OC48 OC48 TCC2/TCC2P Cross Connect AIC-I (Optional) Cross Connect TCC2/TCC2P Free Slot DS1-14 DS1-14 DS1N-14 DS1-14 DS1-14 Figure 12-10 shows the shelf assembly layout for the remaining sites in the ring. In this BLSR configuration, an additional eight DS-3s at Node IDs 1 and 3 can be activated.
Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades 12.2 12.2.5 BLSR Fiber Connections 12.2.5 BLSR Fiber Connections Plan your fiber connections and use the same plan for all BLSR nodes. For example, make the east port the farthest slot to the right and the west port the farthest slot to the left. Plug fiber connected to an east port at one node into the west port on an adjacent node. Figure 12-11 shows fiber connections for a two-fiber BLSR with trunk cards in Slot 5 (west) and Slot 12 (east).
Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades 12.3 12.3 Dual-Ring Interconnect Connecting Fiber to a Four-Node, Four-Fiber BLSR West Node 1 Node 2 Tx Rx Tx Rx East West Slot Slot 12 13 Slot Slot 6 5 Slot Slot 12 13 Slot Slot 6 5 Tx Rx East Tx Rx West East West Slot Slot 12 13 Slot Slot 5 6 Node 4 East Slot Slot 12 13 Slot Slot 5 6 Node 3 Working fibers Protect fibers 61958 Figure 12-12 12.
Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades 12.3 12.3.1 BLSR DRI • Both a service selector and a path selector • Both a line switch and a path switch of a service selector For example, if a path protection DRI service selector switch does not restore traffic, then the path selector switches after the hold-off time. The path protection DRI hold-off timer default is 100 ms. You can change this setting in the UPSR Selectors tab of the Edit Circuits window.
Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades 12.3 12.3.1 BLSR DRI Figure 12-13 ONS 15454 Traditional BLSR Dual-Ring Interconnect (Same-Side Routing) Node 1 Node 5 Node 2 BLSR Ring 1 Primary Node Secondary Node Node 4 Node 3 Node 9 Node 8 Secondary Node Primary Node BLSR Ring 2 Node 10 Node 7 Node 6 Drop and Continue Primary Path, Drop and Continue to Bridge Secondary Path 115235 Service Selector Figure 12-14 shows ONS 15454 nodes in a traditional BLSR-DRI topology with opposite-side routing.
Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades 12.3 12.3.1 BLSR DRI Figure 12-14 ONS 15454 Traditional BLSR Dual-Ring Interconnect (Opposite-Side Routing) Node 1 Node 5 Node 2 BLSR Ring 1 Primary Node Secondary Node Node 4 Node 3 Node 9 Node 8 Primary Node Secondary Node BLSR Ring 2 Node 10 Node 7 Node 6 Drop and Continue Primary Path, Drop and Continue to Bridge Secondary Path 115234 Service Selector Figure 12-15 shows ONS 15454s in an integrated BLSR-DRI topology.
Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades 12.3 12.3.1 BLSR DRI Figure 12-15 ONS 15454 Integrated BLSR Dual-Ring Interconnect Node 1 Node 2 BLSR 1 Primary Secondary Node 3 Node 4 Node 8 Secondary Primary Node 5 BLSR 2 Node 7 Node 6 Primary Path (working) Secondary Path (protection) 115236 Service Selector Figure 12-16 shows an example of an integrated BLSR DRI on the Edit Circuits window. Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.
Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades 12.4 12.4 Comparison of the Protection Schemes Figure 12-16 Integrated BLSR DRI on the Edit Circuits Window 12.4 Comparison of the Protection Schemes Table 12-4 shows a comparison of the different protection schemes using OC-48 as an example.
Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades 12.5 12.5 Linear ADM Configurations 12.5 Linear ADM Configurations You can configure ONS 15454s as a line of add/drop multiplexers (ADMs) by configuring one set of OC-N cards as the working path and a second set as the protect path.
Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades 12.6 12.6 Path-Protected Mesh Networks Figure 12-18 Path-Protected Mesh Network Source Node Node 3 Node 5 Node 2 Node 4 Node 1 Node 10 Node 8 Node 6 Node 7 Node 11 Node 9 c raffi ng t ki Wor Destination Node = Primary path = Secondary path 32136 Protect traffic PPMN also allows spans with different SONET speeds to be mixed together in “virtual rings.” Figure 12-19 shows Nodes 1, 2, 3, and 4 in a standard OC-48 ring.
Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades 12.7 12.7 Four-Shelf Node Configurations Figure 12-19 ONS 15454 Node 5 PPMN Virtual Ring ONS 15454 Node 1 OC-12 ONS 15454 Node 4 ONS 15454 Node 8 OC-12 32137 OC-48 ONS 15454 Node 6 ONS 15454 Node 2 ONS 15454 Node 3 ONS 15454 Node 7 12.7 Four-Shelf Node Configurations You can link multiple ONS 15454s using their OC-N cards (that is, create a fiber-optic bus) to accommodate more access traffic than a single ONS 15454 can support.
Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades 12.8 12.8 OC-N Speed Upgrades Figure 12-20 Four-Shelf Node Configuration Redundant OC-N Feed Up to 72 DS-3s, 84 DS-1s Redundant OC-N Bus ONS 15454, Node 1 Up to 72 DS-3s, 84 DS-1s Redundant OC-N Bus ONS 15454, Node 2 Up to 72 DS-3s, 84 DS-1s Redundant OC-N Bus ONS 15454, Node 3 ONS 15454, Node 4 32097 Up to 96 DS-3s, 112 DS-1s 12.8 OC-N Speed Upgrades A span is the optical fiber connection between two ONS 15454 nodes.
Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades 12.8 12.8 OC-N Speed Upgrades • OC-48 to OC192SR1/STM64IO Short Reach or OC192/STM64 Any Reach Table 12-5 lists permitted upgrades for Slots 5, 6, 12, and 13 (high-speed slots).
Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades 12.8 12.8.1 Span Upgrade Wizard Note Replacing cards that are the same speed are not considered span upgrades. For example replacing a four-port OC-3 with an eight-port OC-3 card or replacing a single-port OC-12 with a four-port OC-12 card. To perform a span upgrade, the higher-rate OC-N card must replace the lower-rate card in the same slot. If the upgrade is conducted on spans residing in a BLSR, all spans in the ring must be upgraded.
Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades 12.9 12.9 In-Service Topology Upgrades Procedures for manual span upgrades can be found in the “Upgrade Cards and Spans” chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide. Five manual span upgrade options are available: • Upgrade on a two-fiber BLSR • Upgrade on a four-fiber BLSR • Upgrade on a path protection • Upgrade on a 1+1 protection group • Upgrade on an unprotected span 12.
Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades 12.9 12.9.1 Unprotected Point-to-Point or Linear ADM to Path Protection 12.9.1 Unprotected Point-to-Point or Linear ADM to Path Protection CTC provides a topology conversion wizard for converting an unprotected point-to-point or linear ADM topology to path protection. This conversion occurs at the circuit level. CTC calculates the additional path protection circuit route automatically or you can do it manually.
Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades 12.9 12.9.3 Path Protection to Two-Fiber BLSR 12.9.3 Path Protection to Two-Fiber BLSR CTC provides a topology conversion wizard to convert a path protection to a two-fiber BLSR. An upgrade from a path protection to a two-fiber BLSR changes path protection to line protection. A path protection can have a maximum of 16 nodes before conversion. Circuits paths must occupy the same time slots around the ring.
Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades 12.9 12.9.5 Add or Remove a Node from a Topology Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.
CH A P T E R 13 Management Network Connectivity This chapter provides an overview of ONS 15454 data communications network (DCN) connectivity. Cisco Optical Networking System (ONS) network communication is based on IP, including communication between Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) computers and ONS 15454 nodes, and communication among networked ONS 15454 nodes.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.2 13.2 IP Addressing Scenarios • IP subnetting can create multiple logical ONS 15454 networks within a single Class A, B, or C IP network. If you do not subnet, you will only be able to use one network from your Class A, B, or C network. • Different IP functions and protocols can be used to achieve specific network goals.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.2 13.2.1 IP Scenario 1: CTC and ONS 15454s on Same Subnet 13.2.1 IP Scenario 1: CTC and ONS 15454s on Same Subnet IP Scenario 1 shows a basic ONS 15454 LAN configuration (Figure 13-1). The ONS 15454s and CTC computer reside on the same subnet. All ONS 15454s connect to LAN A, and all ONS 15454s have DCC connections. Figure 13-1 IP Scenario 1: CTC and ONS 15454s on Same Subnet CTC Workstation IP Address 192.168.1.100 Subnet Mask 255.255.255.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.2 13.2.3 IP Scenario 3: Using Proxy ARP to Enable an ONS 15454 Gateway Figure 13-2 IP Scenario 2: CTC and ONS 15454 Nodes Connected to a Router LAN A Int "A" Int "B" Router IP Address of interface “A” to LAN “A” 192.168.1.1 IP Address of interface “B” to LAN “B” 192.168.2.1 Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Default Router = N/A Host Routes = N/A LAN B CTC Workstation IP Address 192.168.1.100 Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Default Gateway = 192.168.1.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.2 13.2.3 IP Scenario 3: Using Proxy ARP to Enable an ONS 15454 Gateway IP Scenario 3 is similar to IP Scenario 1, but only one ONS 15454 (1) connects to the LAN (Figure 13-3). Two ONS 15454s (2 and 3) connect to ONS 15454 1 through the SONET DCC. Because all three ONS 15454s are on the same subnet, proxy ARP enables ONS 15454 1 to serve as a gateway for ONS 15454 2 and 3. Note This scenario assumes all CTC connections are to Node 1.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.2 13.2.4 IP Scenario 4: Default Gateway on a CTC Computer In Figure 13-4, Node 1 announces to Node 2 and 3 that it can reach the CTC host. Similarly, Node 3 announces that it can reach the ONS 152xx. The ONS 152xx is shown as an example; any network element (NE) can be set up as an additional host. Figure 13-4 IP Scenario 3: Using Proxy ARP with Static Routing CTC Workstation IP Address 192.168.1.100 Subnet Mark at CTC Workstation 255.255.255.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.2 13.2.5 IP Scenario 5: Using Static Routes to Connect to LANs Figure 13-5 IP Scenario 4: Default Gateway on a CTC Computer CTC Workstation IP Address 192.168.1.100 Subnet Mask at CTC Workstation 255.255.255.0 Default Gateway = 192.168.1.10 Host Routes = N/A LAN A ONS 15454 #1 IP Address 192.168.1.10 Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Default Router = N/A Static Routes = N/A ONS 15454 #2 IP Address 192.168.2.20 Subnet Mask 255.255.255.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.2 13.2.5 IP Scenario 5: Using Static Routes to Connect to LANs Figure 13-6 IP Scenario 5: Static Route With One CTC Computer Used as a Destination Router IP Address of interface ”A” to LAN “A” 192.168.1.1 IP Address of interface “B” to LAN “B” 192.168.2.1 Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Static Routes Destination 192.168.3.0 Destination 192.168.4.0 Mask 255.255.255.0 Mask 255.255.255.0 Next Hop 192.168.2.10 Next Hop 192.168.2.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.2 13.2.5 IP Scenario 5: Using Static Routes to Connect to LANs Figure 13-7 IP Scenario 5: Static Route With Multiple LAN Destinations LAN D Router #3: IP Address of the interface connected to LAN-C = 192.168.5.10 IP Address of the interface connected to LAN-D = 192.168.6.1 Subnet Mask = 255.255.255.0 Static Routes: Destination = 192.168.0.0 Destination = 192.168.4.0 Mask = 255.255.255.0 Mask = 255.255.255.0 Next Hop = 192.168.5.1 Next Hop = 192.168.5.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.2 13.2.6 IP Scenario 6: Using OSPF 13.2.6 IP Scenario 6: Using OSPF Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) is a link state Internet routing protocol. Link state protocols use a “hello protocol” to monitor their links with adjacent routers and to test the status of their links to their neighbors. Link state protocols advertise their directly connected networks and their active links.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.2 13.2.6 IP Scenario 6: Using OSPF Figure 13-8 IP Scenario 6: OSPF Enabled Router IP Address of interface “A” to LAN A 192.168.1.1 IP Address of interface “B” to LAN B 192.168.2.1 Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 LAN A Int "A" CTC Workstation IP Address 192.168.1.100 Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Default Gateway = 192.168.1.1 Host Routes = N/A Int "B" LAN B ONS 15454 #1 IP Address 192.168.2.10 Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Default Router = 192.168.2.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.2 13.2.7 IP Scenario 7: Provisioning the ONS 15454 SOCKS Proxy Server Figure 13-9 IP Scenario 6: OSPF Not Enabled LAN A Int "A" CTC Workstation IP Address 192.168.1.100 Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Default Gateway = 192.168.1.1 Host Routes = N/A Router IP Address of interface “A” to LAN A 192.168.1.1 IP Address of interface “B” to LAN B 192.168.2.1 Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Static Routes = Destination 192.168.3.20 Next Hop 192.168.2.10 Destination 192.168.4.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.2 13.2.7 IP Scenario 7: Provisioning the ONS 15454 SOCKS Proxy Server The ONS 15454 gateway setting performs the following tasks: • Isolates DCC IP traffic from Ethernet (craft port) traffic and accepts packets based on filtering rules. The filtering rules (see Table 13-3 on page 13-17 and Table 13-4 on page 13-18) depend on whether the packet arrives at the ONS 15454 DCC or the TCC2/TCC2P Ethernet interface.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.2 13.2.7 IP Scenario 7: Provisioning the ONS 15454 SOCKS Proxy Server Note If you launch CTC against a node through a Network Address Translation (NAT) or Port Address Translation (PAT) router and that node does not have proxy enabled, your CTC session starts and initially appears to be fine. However, CTC never receives alarm updates and disconnects and reconnects every two minutes.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.2 13.2.7 IP Scenario 7: Provisioning the ONS 15454 SOCKS Proxy Server Figure 13-11 IP Scenario 7: ONS 15454 SOCKS Proxy Server with GNE and ENEs on the Same Subnet Remote CTC 10.10.20.10 10.10.20.0/24 Interface 0/0 10.10.20.1 Router A Interface 0/1 10.10.10.1 10.10.10.0/24 ONS 15454 GNE 10.10.10.100/24 ONS 15454 ENE 10.10.10.150/24 ONS 15454 ENE 10.10.10.250/24 ONS 15454 ENE 10.10.10.200/24 SONET 71673 Ethernet Local/Craft CTC 10.10.10.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.2 13.2.7 IP Scenario 7: Provisioning the ONS 15454 SOCKS Proxy Server Figure 13-12 IP Scenario 7: ONS 15454 SOCKS Proxy Server with GNE and ENEs on Different Subnets Remote CTC 10.10.20.10 10.10.20.0/24 Interface 0/0 10.10.20.1 Router A Interface 0/1 10.10.10.1 10.10.10.0/24 ONS 15454 GNE 10.10.10.100/24 ONS 15454 ENE 192.168.10.150/24 ONS 15454 ENE 192.168.10.250/24 ONS 15454 ENE 192.168.10.200/24 SONET 71674 Ethernet Local/Craft CTC 192.168.10.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.2 13.2.7 IP Scenario 7: Provisioning the ONS 15454 SOCKS Proxy Server Figure 13-13 IP Scenario 7: ONS 15454 SOCKS Proxy Server With ENEs on Multiple Rings Remote CTC 10.10.20.10 10.10.20.0/24 Interface 0/0 10.10.20.1 Router A Interface 0/1 10.10.10.1 10.10.10.0/24 ONS 15454 GNE 10.10.10.100/24 ONS 15454 ENE 192.168.10.150/24 ONS 15454 GNE 10.10.10.200/24 ONS 15454 ENE 192.168.10.250/24 ONS 15454 ENE 192.168.60.150/24 ONS 15454 ENE 192.168.10.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.2 13.2.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.2 13.2.8 IP Scenario 8: Dual GNEs on a Subnet Figure 13-14 IP Scenario 8: Dual GNEs on the Same Subnet Remote CTC 10.10.20.10 10.10.20.0/24 Interface 0/0 10.10.20.1 Router A Interface 0/1 10.10.10.1 ONS 15454 GNE 10.10.10.100/24 ONS 15454 GNE 10.10.10.150/24 ONS 15454 ENE 10.10.10.250/24 ONS 15454 ENE 10.10.10.200/24 Ethernet Local/Craft CTC 192.168.20.20 SONET 115258 10.10.10.0/24 Figure 13-15 shows a network with dual GNEs on different subnets.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.2 13.2.9 IP Scenario 9: IP Addressing with Secure Mode Enabled Figure 13-15 IP Scenario 8: Dual GNEs on Different Subnets Remote CTC 10.10.20.10 10.10.20.0/24 Interface 0/0 10.10.20.1 Router A Interface 0/2 10.20.10.1 10.10.10.0/24 10.20.10.0/24 ONS 15454 GNE 10.10.10.100/24 ONS 15454 GNE 10.20.10.100/24 ONS 15454 ENE 192.168.10.250/24 ONS 15454 ENE 192.168.10.200/24 Ethernet Local/Craft CTC 192.168.20.20 SONET 115259 Interface 0/1 10.10.10.1 13.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.2 13.2.9 IP Scenario 9: IP Addressing with Secure Mode Enabled Figure 13-16 on page 13-21 shows an example of ONS 15454s on the same subnet with secure mode enabled. Note Secure mode is not available if TCC2 cards are installed. If one TCC2 and one TCC2P card are installed, secure mode will appear in CTC but cannot be modified. Figure 13-16 IP Scenario 9: ONS 15454 GNE and ENEs on the Same Subnet with Secure Mode Enabled Remote CTC 10.10.20.10 10.10.20.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.3 13.3 Provisionable Patchcords Figure 13-17 IP Scenario 9: ONS 15454 GNE and ENEs on Different Subnets with Secure Mode Enabled Remote CTC 10.10.20.10 10.10.20.0/24 Interface 0/0 10.10.20.1 Router A Interface 0/1 10.10.10.1 10.10.10.0/24 ONS 15454 GNE Backplane - 10.10.10.100/24 TCC2P - 176.20.20.40/24 ONS 15454 ENE 192.168.10.150/24 - Backplane 176.20.20.10/24 - TCC2P ONS 15454 ENE Backplane - 192.168.10.250/24 TCC2P - 176.20.20.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.3 13.3 Provisionable Patchcords Table 13-5 lists the supported card combinations for client and trunk ports in a provisionable patchcord. Table 13-5 Cisco ONS 15454 Client/Trunk Card Combinations for Provisionable Patchcords Client Cards MXP_2.5G_10G/ TXP_MR_10G TXP(P)_MR_2.5G MXP_2.5G_10E/ TXP_MR_10E 32MUX-O 32DMX-O 32WSS/ 32DMX AD-xC-xx.x 4MD-xx.x MXP_2.5G_10G/ TXP_MR_10G — — — Yes Yes Yes Yes TXP(P)_MR_2.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.4 13.4 Routing Table Optical ports have the following requirements when used in a provisionable patchcord: • An optical port connected to a TXP/MXP port, add/drop multiplexer port, or multiplexer/demultiplexer port requires a Section DCC/Line DCC (SDCC/LDCC) termination. • If the optical port is the protection port in a 1+1 group, the working port must have an SDCC/LDCC termination provisioned.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.5 13.5 External Firewalls Entry 1 shows the following: • Destination (0.0.0.0) is the default route entry. All undefined destination network or host entries on this routing table are mapped to the default route entry. • Mask (0.0.0.0) is always 0 for the default route. • Gateway (172.20.214.1) is the default gateway address. All outbound traffic that cannot be found in this routing table or is not on the node’s local subnet is sent to this gateway.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.5 13.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.6 13.6 Open GNE access-list access-list access-list access-list 100 100 100 100 remark *** allows CTC communication with ONS 15454 GNE (port 57790) *** remark permit tcp host 192.168.10.10 host 10.10.10.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.6 13.6 Open GNE To set up proxy and firewall subnets in CTC, use the Provisioning > Network > Proxy and Firewalls subtabs. The availability of proxy and/or firewall tunnels depends on the network access settings of the node: • If the node is configured with the SOCKS proxy server enabled in GNE or ENE mode, you must set up a proxy tunnel and/or a firewall tunnel.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.7 13.7 TCP/IP and OSI Networking Figure 13-19 Foreign Node Connection to an ENE Ethernet Port Remote CTC 10.10.20.10 10.10.20.0/24 Interface 0/0 10.10.20.1 Router A Interface 0/1 10.10.10.1 ONS 15454 GNE 10.10.10.100/24 ONS 15454 ENE 10.10.10.150/24 ONS 15454 ENE 10.10.10.250/24 ONS 15454 ENE 10.10.10.200/24 Non-ONS node Foreign NE 130.94.122.199/28 Ethernet Local/Craft CTC 192.168.20.20 SONET 115749 10.10.10.0/24 13.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.7 13.7.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.7 13.7.2 Link Access Protocol on the D Channel 13.7.2 Link Access Protocol on the D Channel LAP-D is a data link protocol used in the OSI protocol stack. LAP-D is assigned when you provision an ONS 15454 SDCC as OSI-only.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.7 13.7.3 OSI Connectionless Network Service CLNP uses network service access points (NSAPs) to identify network devices. The CLNP source and destination addresses are NSAPs. In addition, CLNP uses a network element title (NET) to identify a network-entity in an end system (ES) or intermediate system (IS). NETs are allocated from the same name space as NSAP addresses.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.7 13.7.3 OSI Connectionless Network Service Table 13-11 NSAP Fields (continued) Field Definition Description System System identifier The ONS 15454 system identifier is set to its IEEE 802.3 MAC address. Each ONS 15454 supports three OSI virtual routers. Each router NSAP system identifier is the ONS 15454 IEEE 802.3 MAC address + n, where n = 0 to 2. For the primary virtual router, n = 0.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.7 13.7.4 OSI Routing Figure 13-21 OSI Main Setup This address is also the Router 1 primary manual area address, which is viewed and edited on the Provisioning > OSI > Routers subtab. See the “13.7.7 OSI Virtual Routers” section on page 13-41 for information about the OSI router and manual area addresses in CTC. 13.7.4 OSI Routing OSI architecture includes ESs and ISs.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.7 13.7.4 OSI Routing In OSI networking, discovery is based on announcements. An ES uses the ES-IS protocol end system hello (ESH) message to announce its presence to ISs and ESs connected to the same network. Any ES or IS that is listening for ESHs gets a copy. ISs store the NSAP address and the corresponding subnetwork address pair in routing tables. ESs might store the address, or they might wait to be informed by ISs when they need such information.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.7 13.7.4 OSI Routing • Intermediate System Level 1/Level 2—The ONS 15454 performs IS functions. It communicates with IS and ES nodes that reside within its OSI area. It also communicates with IS L1/L2 nodes that reside in other OSI areas. This option should not be provisioned unless the node is connected to another IS L1/L2 node that resides in a different OSI area.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.7 13.7.5 TARP 13.7.5 TARP TARP is used when TL1 target identifiers (TIDs) must be translated to NSAP addresses. The TID-to-NSAP translation occurs by mapping TIDs to the NETs, then deriving NSAPs from the NETs by using the NSAP selector values (Table 13-11 on page 13-32). TARP uses a selective PDU propagation methodology in conjunction with a distributed database (that resides within the NEs) of TID-to-NET mappings.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.7 13.7.5 TARP Table 13-13 TARP PDU Types (continued) Type Description Actions 3 Sent as a response to Type 1, Type 2, or After a TARP Request (Type 1 or 2) PDU is received, Type 5 PDUs. a TARP Type 3 PDU is sent to the request originator. Type 3 PDUs do not use the TARP propagation procedures. 4 Sent as a notification when a change occurs locally, for example, a TID or NSAP change. It might also be sent when an NE initializes.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.7 13.7.5 TARP Table 13-15 TARP Processing Flow Process Find a NET that matches a TID Find a TID that matches a NET General TARP Flow 1. TARP checks its TDC for a match. If a match is found, TARP returns the result to the requesting application. 2. If no match is found, a TARP Type 1 PDU is generated and Timer T1 is started. 3. If Timer T1 expires before a match if found, a Type 2 PDU is generated and Timer T2 is started. 4.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.7 13.7.6 TCP/IP and OSI Mediation Figure 13-23 Manual TARP Adjacencies DCN Generic router Manual adjacency 131957 DCN 13.7.5.4 Manual TID to NSAP Provisioning TIDs can be manually linked to NSAPs and added to the TDC. Static TDC entries are similar to static routes. For a specific TID, you force a specific NSAP. Resolution requests for that TID always return that NSAP. No TARP network propagation or instantaneous replies are involved.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.7 13.7.7 OSI Virtual Routers Figure 13-24 T–TD Protocol Flow OSS GNE ENE TL1 TL1 Gateway TL1 Gateway ACSE ACSE Presentation Presentation Session Session TP4 TP4 TL1 UDP • TCP UDP TCP TL1 IPv4 ISIS / CLNS ISIS / CLNS LLC1 LAPD LAPD LAN LAN DCC DCC 131954 IPv4 LLC1 FT–TD—Performs an FTP conversion between FTAM and FTP.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.7 13.7.7 OSI Virtual Routers Figure 13-26 Provisioning OSI Routers Each router has an editable manual area address and a unique NSAP System ID that is set to the node MAC address + n. For Router 1, n = 0. For Router 2, n = 1. For Router 3, n = 2. Each router can be enabled and connected to different OSI routing areas. However, Router 1 is the primary router, and it must be enabled before Router 2 and Router 3 can be enabled.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.7 13.7.8 IP-over-CLNS Tunnels Table 13-16 OSI Virtual Router Constraints Routing Mode IS L1 Router 1 Router 2 Router 3 per area IS L1/L2 per area DCC per IS End System Yes No No — — — IS L1 Yes Yes Yes 250 — 40 IS L1/L2 Yes Yes Yes 250 50 40 Each OSI virtual router has a primary manual area address. You can also create two additional manual area addresses.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.7 13.7.8 IP-over-CLNS Tunnels Figure 13-27 IP-over-CLNS Tunnel Flow NE-D NE-C NE-B NE-A (GNE) EMS HTTP FTP Telnet SNMP RMON HTTP FTP Telnet UDP TCP UDP TCP IPv4 GRE Tunnel CLNP CLNP CLNP CLNP LLC1 LAPD LAPD LAPD LAN DCC DCC DCC GRE Tunnel IPv4 IPv4 LAPD LLC1 LLC1 DCC LAN LAN 131956 SNMP RMON 13.7.8.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.7 13.7.8 IP-over-CLNS Tunnels Table 13-17 IP-over-CLNS Tunnel IOS Commands Step Step Purpose 1 Router (config) # interface ctunnel interface-number Creates a virtual interface to transport IP over a CLNS tunnel and enters interface configuration mode. The interface number must be unique for each CTunnel interface. 2 Router (config-if # ctunnel destination remote-nsap-address Configures the destination parameter for the CTunnel.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.7 13.7.8 IP-over-CLNS Tunnels Figure 13-28 IP-over-CLNS Tunnel Scenario 1: ONS NE to Other Vender GNE CTC 1 10.10.10.100/24 Router 2 Interface 0/0: 10.10.10.10/24 Interface 0/1: 10.10.20.10/24 39.840F.80.111111.0000.1111.1111.aaaaaaaaaaaa.00 IP DCN Router 1 Interface 0/0: 10.10.20.20/24 Interface 0/1: 10.10.30.10/24 39.840F.80. 111111.0000.1111.1111.bbbbbbbbbbbb.00 IP/OSI Vendor GNE 10.10.30.20/24 39.840F.80. 111111.0000.1111.1111.cccccccccccc.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.7 13.7.8 IP-over-CLNS Tunnels clns routing interface ctunnel 102 ip address 10.10.30.30 255.255.255.0 ctunnel destination 39.840F.80.1111.0000.1111.1111.dddddddddddd.00 interface Ethernet0/1 clns router isis router isis net 39.840F.80.1111.0000.1111.1111.bbbbbbbbbbbb.00 Figure 13-29 IP-over-CLNS Tunnel Scenario 2: ONS Node to Router CTC 1 10.10.10.100/24 Router 2 Interface 0/0: 10.10.10.10/24 Interface 0/1: 10.10.20.10/24 39.840F.80.111111.0000.1111.1111.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.7 13.7.8 IP-over-CLNS Tunnels ONS NE 1 IP-over-CLNS tunnel provisioning: • Destination: Router 2 IP address • Mask: 255.255.255.255 for host route (CTC 1 only), or 255.255.255.0 for subnet route (all CTC computers on the same subnet) • NSAP: Other vender GNE NSAP address • Metric: 110 • Tunnel Type: Cisco IP Router 2 IP-over-CLNS tunnel provisioning (sample Cisco IOS provisioning): ip routing clns routing interface ctunnel 102 ip address 10.10.30.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.7 13.7.9 OSI/IP Networking Scenarios Figure 13-30 IP-over-CLNS Tunnel Scenario 3: ONS Node to Router Across an OSI DCN CTC 1 10.10.10.100/24 IP Router 2 Interface 0/0: 10.10.10.10/24 Interface 0/1: 10.10.20.10/24 39.840F.80.111111.0000.1111.1111.aaaaaaaaaaaa.00 OSI DCN Router 1 Interface 0/0: 10.10.20.20/24 Interface 0/1: 10.10.30.10/24 39.840F.80. 111111.0000.1111.1111.bbbbbbbbbbbb.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.7 13.7.9 OSI/IP Networking Scenarios • All ONS 15454 NEs participating in an OSI network run OSI over PPP between themselves. This is needed so that other vendor GNEs can route TL1 commands to all ONS 15454 NEs participating in the OSI network. 13.7.9.1 OSI/IP Scenario 1: IP OSS, IP DCN, ONS GNE, IP DCC, and ONS ENE Figure 13-31 shows OSI/IP Scenario 1, the current ONS 15454 IP-based implementation, with an IP DCN, IP-over-PPP DCC, and OSPF routing.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.7 13.7.9 OSI/IP Networking Scenarios Figure 13-32 OSI/IP Scenario 2: IP OSS, IP DCN, ONS GNE, OSI DCC, and Other Vendor ENE 1 CTC/CTM IP OSS IP IP IP DCN IP ONS GNE 2 3 4 IP and OSI/PPP/DCC OSI/LAP-D/DCC IP/OSPF ONS NE OSI/IS-IS Other vendor NE 5 ONS NE OSI/LAP-D/DCC Other vendor NE 131932 IP and OSI/PPP/DCC 1 The IP OSS manages ONS 15454 and other vendor NEs using TL1 and FTP.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.7 13.7.9 OSI/IP Networking Scenarios OSS-initiated software downloads consist of two parts: the OSS to destination NE TL1 download request and the file transfer. The TL1 request is handled the same as described in the previous paragraph. The ONS 15454 NEs use FTP for file transfers. OSI-only NEs use FTAM to perform file transfers. The FTAM protocol is carried over OSI between the OSI NE and the ONS 15454 GNE. The GNE mediation translates between FTAM to FTP.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.7 13.7.9 OSI/IP Networking Scenarios Figure 13-33 OSI/IP Scenario 3: IP OSS, IP DCN, Other Vendor GNE, OSI DCC, and ONS ENE 1 CTC/CTM IP OSS IP IP IP DCN IP OSI 2 3 Other vendor GNE OSI/LAP-D/DCC OSI/LAPD/DCC IP and OSI/PPP/DCC ONS NE 2 4 Other vendor NE OSI/LAP-D/DCC Other vendor NE 131933 ONS NE 1 1 The IP OSS manages the ONS 15454 and other vendor NEs using TL1 and FTP.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.7 13.7.9 OSI/IP Networking Scenarios Figure 13-34 OSI/IP Scenario 3 with OSI/IP-over-CLNS Tunnel Endpoint at the GNE 1 CTC/CTM IP OSS IP IP IP DCN 2 IP Other vendor GNE 4 3 OSI/LAP-D/DCC OSI/LAPD/DCC 5 IP and OSI/PPP/DCC ONS NE 2 Other vendor NE OSI/LAP-D/DCC Other vendor NE 131931 ONS NE 1 1 The IP OSS manages ONS and other vendor NEs using TL1 and FTP. 2 The router routes requests to the other vender GNE.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.7 13.7.9 OSI/IP Networking Scenarios Figure 13-35 OSI/IP Scenario 4: Multiple ONS DCC Areas 1 CTC/CTM IP OSS IP IP IP DCN IP IP 2 2 OSI 2 Other vendor GNE OSI/ LAP-D/ DCC OSI/ LAP-D/ DCC OSI/ LAP-D/ DCC ONS NE ONS NE IP and OSI/PPP/DCC IP and OSI/PPP/DCC IP and OSI/PPP/DCC ONS NE ONS NE ONS NE 131934 ONS NE 1 The IP OSS manages ONS 15454 and other vendor NEs using TL1 and FTP.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.7 13.7.9 OSI/IP Networking Scenarios Figure 13-36 OSI/IP Scenario 5: GNE Without an OSI DCC Connection 1 CTC/CTM IP OSS IP IP IP DCN IP IP 3 2 Other vendor GNE OSI/ LAP-D/ DCC ONS NE Other vendor NE IP and OSI/PPP/DCC OSI/LAP-D/DCC ONS NE Other vendor NE 131935 4 OSI/ LAP-D/ DCC 1 The IP OSS manages ONS 15454 and other vendor NEs using TL1 and FTP. 2 The other vendor GNE performs mediation on TL1 and FTP, so DCCs are OSI-only.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.7 13.7.9 OSI/IP Networking Scenarios Figure 13-37 OSI/IP Scenario 6: IP OSS, OSI DCN, ONS GNE, OSI DCC, and Other Vendor ENE 1 CTC/CTM IP OSS IP IP OSI OSI OSI DCN 3 2 OSI IP 4 ONS GNE ONS GNE IP and OSI/PPP/DCC ONS GNE OSI/ LAP-D/ DCC Other vendor NE OSI/LAP-D/DCC Other vendor NE 131936 OSI/ LAP-D/ DCC 1 The IP OSS manages ONS 15454 and other vendor NEs using TL1 and FTP.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.7 13.7.9 OSI/IP Networking Scenarios Figure 13-38 OSI/IP Scenario 7: OSI OSS, OSI DCN, Other Vender GNE, OSI DCC, and ONS NEs 1 2 CTC/CTM IP OSS IP OSI OSI OSI DCN OSI 3 Other vendor GNE OSI/ LAP-D/ DCC ONS NE 1 Other vendor NE 1 IP and OSI/PPP/DCC ONS NE 2 OSI/ LAP-D/ DCC OSI/LAP-D/DCC Other vendor NE 2 IP and OSI/PPP/DCC 131937 ONS NE 3 1 ONS 15454 NEs are managed by CTC/CTM only (TL1/FTP is not used).
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.7 13.7.9 OSI/IP Networking Scenarios • TL1 management is not required. • FTP file transfer is not required. • TL1 and FTAM to FTP mediation is not required. Management traffic between CTC/CTM and ONS 15454 NEs is carried over an IP-over-CLNS tunnel. A static route is configured on the ONS 15454 that terminates the tunnel (ONS 15454 NE 1) so that downstream ONS 15454 NEs (ONS 15454 NE 2 and 3) know how to reach CTC/CTM. 13.7.9.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.7 13.7.9 OSI/IP Networking Scenarios Figure 13-39 OSI/IP Scenario 8: OSI OSS, OSI DCN, ONS GNE, OSI DCC, and Other Vender NEs 1 2 CTC/CTM IP OSS IP OSI OSI OSI DCN 3 OSI ONS GNE 4 IP and OSI/LAP-D/ DCC ONS NE 1 IP and OSI/PPP/DCC ONS NE 2 OSI/ LAP-D/ DCC Other vendor NE 1 OSI/LAP-D/DCC Other vendor NE 2 Other vendor NE 3 131938 OSI/PPP/DCC 1 The ONS NEs are managed by CTC/CTM only (TL1/FTP is not used).
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.7 13.7.10 Provisioning OSI in CTC 13.7.10 Provisioning OSI in CTC Table 13-18 shows the OSI actions that are performed from the node view Provisioning tab. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide for OSI procedures and tasks. Table 13-18 OSI Actions from the CTC Provisioning Tab Tab Actions OSI > Main Setup OSI > TARP > Config • View and edit Primary Area Address. • Change OSI routing mode. • Change LSP buffers.
Chapter 13 Management Network Connectivity 13.7 13.7.10 Provisioning OSI in CTC Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.
CH A P T E R 14 Alarm Monitoring and Management This chapter describes Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) alarm management. To troubleshoot specific alarms, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide. Chapter topics include: • 14.1 Overview, page 14-1 • 14.2 LCD Alarm Counts, page 14-1 • 14.3 Alarm Information, page 14-2 • 14.4 Alarm Severities, page 14-9 • 14.5 Alarm Profiles, page 14-9 • 14.6 Alarm Suppression, page 14-13 • 14.7 External Alarms and Controls, page 14-14 14.
Chapter 14 Alarm Monitoring and Management 14.3 14.3 Alarm Information The ONS 15454 has a one-button update for some commonly viewed alarm counts. If you press the Slot button once and then wait eight seconds, the display automatically changes from a slot alarm count to a slot alarm summary. If you press the Port button to toggle to port-level display, you can use the Port button to toggle to a specific slot and to view each port’s port-level alarm count. Figure 14-1 shows the LCD panel layout.
Chapter 14 Alarm Monitoring and Management 14.3 14.3 Alarm Information Table 14-1 Note Alarms Column Descriptions (continued) Column Information Recorded Shelf For dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) configurations, the shelf where the alarmed object is located. Visible in network view. Slot Slot where the alarm occurred (appears only in network and node view). Port Port where the alarm is raised. For STSTerm and VTTerm, the port refers to the upstream card it is partnered with.
Chapter 14 Alarm Monitoring and Management 14.3 14.3.1 Viewing Alarms With Each Node’s Time Zone 14.3.1 Viewing Alarms With Each Node’s Time Zone By default, alarms and conditions are displayed with the time stamp of the CTC workstation where you are viewing them. But you can set the node to report alarms (and conditions) using the time zone where the node is located by clicking Edit > Preferences, and clicking the Display Events Using Each Node’s Timezone check box. 14.3.
Chapter 14 Alarm Monitoring and Management 14.3 14.3.4 Viewing Alarm-Affected Circuits 14.3.4 Viewing Alarm-Affected Circuits A user can view which ONS 15454 circuits are affected by a specific alarm by positioning the cursor over the alarm in the Alarm window and right-clicking. A shortcut menu appears (Figure 14-2). When the user selects the Select Affected Circuits option, the Circuits window opens to show the circuits that are affected by the alarm. Figure 14-2 Select Affected Circuits Option 14.3.
Chapter 14 Alarm Monitoring and Management 14.3 14.3.6 Controlling the Conditions Display 14.3.6 Controlling the Conditions Display You can control the display of the conditions on the Conditions window. Table 14-4 shows the actions you can perform in the window. Table 14-4 Conditions Display Button Action Retrieve Retrieves the current set of all existing fault conditions, as maintained by the alarm manager, from the ONS 15454.
Chapter 14 Alarm Monitoring and Management 14.3 14.3.7 Viewing History Table 14-5 Conditions Column Description (continued) Column Information Recorded Path Width Width of the data path. Sev 1 Severity level: CR (Critical), MJ (Major), MN (Minor), NA (Not Alarmed), NR (Not Reported). SA1 Indicates a service-affecting alarm (when checked).
Chapter 14 Alarm Monitoring and Management 14.3 14.3.7 Viewing History If you check the History window Alarms check box, you display the node history of alarms. If you check the Events check box, you display the node history of Not Alarmed and transient events (conditions). If you check both check boxes, you retrieve node history for both. 14.3.7.1 History Column Descriptions Table 14-6 lists the History window column headings and the information recorded in each column.
Chapter 14 Alarm Monitoring and Management 14.4 14.3.8 Alarm History and Log Buffer Capacities on the card in the History > Card window, or a history of alarms, conditions, and transients that have occurred during your login session in the History > Session window. You can also filter the severities and occurrence period in these history windows. 14.3.8 Alarm History and Log Buffer Capacities The ONS 15454 alarm history log, stored in the TCC2/TCC2P RSA memory, contains four categories of alarms.
Chapter 14 Alarm Monitoring and Management 14.5 14.5.1 Creating and Modifying Alarm Profiles CTC can store up to ten active alarm profiles at any time to apply to the node. Custom profiles can take eight of these active profile positions. Two other profiles, Default profile and Inherited profile, are reserved by the NE, and cannot be edited.The reserved Default profile contains Telcordia GR-474 severities.
Chapter 14 Alarm Monitoring and Management 14.5 14.5.2 Alarm Profile Buttons Note Up to 10 profiles, including the two reserved profiles (Inherited and Default) can be stored in CTC. Wherever it is applied, the Default alarm profile sets severities to standard Telcordia GR-253 settings. In the Inherited profile, alarms inherit, or copy, severity from the next-highest level. For example, a card with an Inherited alarm profile copies the severities used by the node housing the card.
Chapter 14 Alarm Monitoring and Management 14.5 14.5.3 Alarm Profile Editing 14.5.3 Alarm Profile Editing Table 14-8 lists and describes the five profile-editing options available when you right-click an alarm item in the profile column. Table 14-8 Alarm Profile Editing Options Button Description Store Saves a profile in a node or in a file. Rename Changes a profile name. Clone Creates a profile that contains the same alarm severity settings as the profile being cloned.
Chapter 14 Alarm Monitoring and Management 14.6 14.5.6 Applying Alarm Profiles 14.5.6 Applying Alarm Profiles In CTC node view, the Alarm Behavior window displays alarm profiles for the node. In card view, the Alarm Behavior window displays the alarm profiles for the selected card. Alarm profiles form a hierarchy. A node-level alarm profile applies to all cards in the node except cards that have their own profiles.
Chapter 14 Alarm Monitoring and Management 14.7 14.6.2 Alarms Suppressed by User Command While the facility is in the OOS,MT state, any alarms or conditions that are raised and suppressed on it (for example, a transmit failure [TRMT] alarm) are reported in the Conditions window and show their normal severity in the Sev column. The suppressed alarms are not shown in the Alarms and History windows. (These windows only show AS-MT).
Chapter 14 Alarm Monitoring and Management 14.7 14.7.2 External Controls • Raised When—Open means that the normal condition is to not have current flowing through the contact, and the alarm is generated when current does flow; closed means that the normal condition is to have current flowing through the contact, and the alarm is generated when current stops flowing. • Description—CTC alarm log description (up to 63 characters).
Chapter 14 Alarm Monitoring and Management 14.7 14.7.2 External Controls Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.
CH A P T E R 15 Performance Monitoring Performance monitoring (PM) parameters are used by service providers to gather, store, set thresholds for, and report performance data for early detection of problems. In this chapter, PM parameters and concepts are defined for electrical cards, Ethernet cards, optical cards, optical multirate cards, and storage access networking (SAN) cards in the Cisco ONS 15454. For information about enabling and viewing PM values, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide.
Chapter 15 Performance Monitoring 15.1 15.1 Threshold Performance Monitoring During the accumulation cycle, if the current value of a PM parameter reaches or exceeds its corresponding threshold value, a threshold crossing alert (TCA) is generated by the node and displayed by CTC. TCAs provide early detection of performance degradation. When a threshold is crossed, the node continues to count the errors during a given accumulation period.
Chapter 15 Performance Monitoring 15.2 15.2 Intermediate Path Performance Monitoring Note Due to limitations of memory and the number of TCAs generated by different platforms, you can manually add/modify the following two properties to the platform property file (CTC.INI for Windows and .ctcrc for UNIX) to fit the need:ctc.15xxx.node.tr.lowater=yyy (where xxx is platform and yyy is the number of the lowater mark. The default lowater mark is 25.) ctc.15xxx.node.tr.
Chapter 15 Performance Monitoring 15.3 15.3 Pointer Justification Count Performance Monitoring Note Far-end IPPM is not supported by all OC-N cards. It is supported by OC3-4 and EC-1 cards. However, SONET path PMs can be monitored by logging into the far-end node directly. The ONS 15454 performs IPPM by examining the overhead in the monitored path and by reading all of the near-end path PM values in the incoming direction of transmission.
Chapter 15 Performance Monitoring 15.4 15.4 Performance Monitoring Parameter Definitions Table 15-3 Performance Monitoring Parameters Parameter Definition AISS-P AIS Seconds Path (AISS-P) is a count of one-second intervals containing one or more alarm indication signal (AIS) defects. BBE-PM Path Monitoring Background Block Errors (BBE-PM) indicates the number of background block errors recorded in the optical transport network (OTN) path during the PM time interval.
Chapter 15 Performance Monitoring 15.4 15.4 Performance Monitoring Parameter Definitions Table 15-3 Performance Monitoring Parameters (continued) Parameter Definition CV-S Section Coding Violation (CV-S) is a count of bit interleaved parity (BIP) errors detected at the section layer (that is, using the B1 byte in the incoming SONET signal). Up to eight section BIP errors can be detected per STS-N frame; each error increments the current CV-S second register.
Chapter 15 Performance Monitoring 15.4 15.4 Performance Monitoring Parameter Definitions Table 15-3 Performance Monitoring Parameters (continued) Parameter Definition ES-S Section Errored Seconds (ES-S) is a count of the number of seconds when at least one section-layer BIP error was detected or an SEF or loss of signal (LOS) defect was present. ES-SM Section Monitoring Errored Seconds (ES-SM) indicates the errored seconds recorded in the OTN section during the PM time interval.
Chapter 15 Performance Monitoring 15.4 15.4 Performance Monitoring Parameter Definitions Table 15-3 Performance Monitoring Parameters (continued) Parameter Definition LOSS-L Line Loss of Signal (LOSS-L) is a count of one-second intervals containing one or more LOS defects. NIOS Non-Idle Ordered Sets (NIOS) is a count of received packets containing non-idle ordered sets.
Chapter 15 Performance Monitoring 15.4 15.4 Performance Monitoring Parameter Definitions Table 15-3 Performance Monitoring Parameters (continued) Parameter Definition PJCS-PDET-P Pointer Justification Count Seconds, STS Path Detect (NPJCS-PDET-P) is a count of the one-second intervals containing one or more PPJC-PDET or NPJC-PDET. PJCS-PGEN-P Pointer Justification Count Seconds, STS Path Generate (PJCS-PGEN-P) is a count of the one-second intervals containing one or more PPJC-PGEN or NPJC-PGEN.
Chapter 15 Performance Monitoring 15.4 15.4 Performance Monitoring Parameter Definitions Table 15-3 Performance Monitoring Parameters (continued) Parameter Definition PSD-S In a four-fiber BLSR, Protection Switching Duration-Span (PSD-S) is a count of the seconds that the protection line was used to carry service. A count is only incremented if span switching is used.
Chapter 15 Performance Monitoring 15.4 15.4 Performance Monitoring Parameter Definitions Table 15-3 Performance Monitoring Parameters (continued) Parameter Definition SESR-PM Path Monitoring Severely Errored Seconds Ratio (SESR-PM) indicates the severely errored seconds ratio recorded in the OTN path during the PM time interval. SESR-SM Section Monitoring Severely Errored Seconds Ratio (SESR-SM) indicates the severely errored seconds ratio recorded in the OTN section during the PM time interval.
Chapter 15 Performance Monitoring 15.5 15.5 Performance Monitoring for Electrical Cards Table 15-3 Performance Monitoring Parameters (continued) Parameter Definition UASP-P Unavailable Seconds Path (UASP-P) is a count of one-second intervals when the DS-3 path is unavailable. A DS-3 path becomes unavailable when ten consecutive SESP-Ps occur. The ten SESP-Ps are included in unavailable time.
Chapter 15 Performance Monitoring 15.5 15.5.1 EC1-12 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters Note Figure 15-3 The XX in Figure 15-2 represents all PMs listed in Table 15-4 with the given prefix and/or suffix.
Chapter 15 Performance Monitoring 15.5 15.5.2 DS1_E1_56 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters Note If the CV-L(NE and FE) falls in the range 51-61 for EC1,then, the user might see discrepancy in the SES and the UAS-L values. However, ES-L will be in the nearest accuracy.
Chapter 15 Performance Monitoring 15.5 15.5.
Chapter 15 Performance Monitoring 15.5 15.5.3 DS1-14 and DS1N-14 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters Table 15-5 lists the PM parameters for the DS1/E1-56 card.
Chapter 15 Performance Monitoring 15.5 15.5.
Chapter 15 Performance Monitoring 15.5 15.5.4 DS3-12 and DS3N-12 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters 15.5.3.1 DS-1 Facility Data Link Performance Monitoring Facility Data Link (FDL) performance monitoring enables an ONS 15454 DS1N-14 card to calculate and report DS-1 error rate performance measured at both the near-end and far-end of the FDL. The far-end information is reported as received on the FDL in a performance report message (PRM) from an intelligent channel service unit (CSU).
Chapter 15 Performance Monitoring 15.5 15.5.
Chapter 15 Performance Monitoring 15.5 15.5.5 DS3-12E and DS3N-12E Card Performance Monitoring Parameters Figure 15-10 Monitored Signal Types for the DS3-12E and DS3N-12E Cards PTE PTE ONS 15454 ONS 15454 DS3 Signal DS3 Signal Fiber DS3E OC-N OC-N DS3E 78977 DS3E Path (DS3 XX) PMs Near and Far End Supported STS Path (STS XX-P) PMs Near and Far End Supported Note The XX in Figure 15-10 represents all PMs listed in Table 15-8 with the given prefix and/or suffix.
Chapter 15 Performance Monitoring 15.5 15.5.6 DS3i-N-12 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters Table 15-8 DS3-12E and DS3N-12E Card PMs Line (NE) Path (NE) STS Path (NE) Path (FE)1 STS Path (FE) CV-L ES-L SES-L LOSS-L AISS-P CV-P ES-P SAS-P2 SES-P UAS-P CVCP-P ESCP-P SASCP-P3 SESCP-P UASCP-P CV-P ES-P SES-P UAS-P FC-P CVCP-PFE ESCP-PFE SASCP-P SESCP-PFE UASCP-PFE CV-PFE ES-PFE SES-PFE UAS-PFE FC-PFE 1.
Chapter 15 Performance Monitoring 15.5 15.5.
Chapter 15 Performance Monitoring 15.5 15.5.7 DS3XM-6 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters 15.5.7 DS3XM-6 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters Figure 15-14 shows the signal types that support near-end and far-end PMs.
Chapter 15 Performance Monitoring 15.5 15.5.
Chapter 15 Performance Monitoring 15.5 15.5.8 DS3XM-12 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters 15.5.8 DS3XM-12 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters Figure 15-16 shows the signal types that support near-end and far-end PMs.
Chapter 15 Performance Monitoring 15.5 15.5.
Chapter 15 Performance Monitoring 15.5 15.5.9 DS3-EC1-48 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters 15.5.9 DS3-EC1-48 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters Figure 15-18 shows the signal types that support near-end and far-end PMs.
Chapter 15 Performance Monitoring 15.5 15.5.
Chapter 15 Performance Monitoring 15.6 15.6 Performance Monitoring for Ethernet Cards Note If the CV-L(NE and FE) falls in the range 51-61 for DS3,then, the user might see discrepancy in the SES and the UAS-L values. However, ES-L will be in the nearest accuracy.
Chapter 15 Performance Monitoring 15.6 15.6.1 E-Series Ethernet Card Performance Monitoring Parameters Table 15-13 E-Series Ethernet Statistics Parameters (continued) Parameter Definition etherStatsUndersizePkts The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.
Chapter 15 Performance Monitoring 15.6 15.6.1 E-Series Ethernet Card Performance Monitoring Parameters 15.6.1.2 E-Series Ethernet Utilization Window The Utilization window shows the percentage of transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx) line bandwidth used by the Ethernet ports during consecutive time segments. The Mode field displays the real-time mode status, such as 100 Full, which is the mode setting configured on the E-Series port.
Chapter 15 Performance Monitoring 15.6 15.6.2 G-Series Ethernet Card Performance Monitoring Parameters 15.6.2 G-Series Ethernet Card Performance Monitoring Parameters CTC provides Ethernet performance information, including line-level parameters, port bandwidth consumption, and historical Ethernet statistics. The G-Series Ethernet performance information is divided into the Statistics, Utilization, and History tabbed windows within the card view Performance tab window. 15.6.2.
Chapter 15 Performance Monitoring 15.6 15.6.2 G-Series Ethernet Card Performance Monitoring Parameters Table 15-16 Note G-Series Ethernet Statistics Parameters (continued) Parameter Definition Rx Unicast Packets Number of unicast packets received since the last counter reset. Tx Unicast Packets Number of unicast packets transmitted. Rx Multicast Packets Number of multicast packets received since the last counter reset. Tx Multicast Packets Number of multicast packets transmitted.
Chapter 15 Performance Monitoring 15.6 15.6.3 ML-Series Ethernet Card Performance Monitoring Parameters 15.6.2.3 G-Series Ethernet History Window The Ethernet History window lists past Ethernet statistics for the previous time intervals. Depending on the selected time interval, the History window displays the statistics for each port for the number of previous time intervals as shown in Table 15-15 on page 15-31. The listed parameters are defined in Table 15-16 on page 15-32. 15.6.
Chapter 15 Performance Monitoring 15.6 15.6.3 ML-Series Ethernet Card Performance Monitoring Parameters Table 15-17 ML-Series Ether Ports PM Parameters (continued) Parameter Definition etherStatsJabbers The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets), and had either a bad FCS with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a nonintegral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Chapter 15 Performance Monitoring 15.6 15.6.3 ML-Series Ethernet Card Performance Monitoring Parameters Table 15-18 ML-Series POS Ports Parameters for HDLC Mode (continued) Parameter Definition mediaIndStatsRxShort Pkts Number of received packets that are too small. hdlcInOctets Number of bytes received (from the SONET/SDH path) prior to the bytes undergoing HLDC decapsulation by the policy engine. hdlcRxAborts Number of received packets aborted on input.
Chapter 15 Performance Monitoring 15.6 15.6.4 CE-Series Ethernet Card Performance Monitoring Parameters 15.6.4 CE-Series Ethernet Card Performance Monitoring Parameters CTC provides Ethernet performance information, including line-level parameters, port bandwidth consumption, and historical Ethernet statistics. The CE-Series card Ethernet performance information is divided into Ether Ports and POS Ports tabbed windows within the card view Performance tab window. 15.6.4.
Chapter 15 Performance Monitoring 15.6 15.6.4 CE-Series Ethernet Card Performance Monitoring Parameters Table 15-20 CE-Series Ether Port PM Parameters (continued) Parameter ifOutMulticastPkts Definition 2 ifOutBroadcastPkts 2 Number of multicast packets transmitted. Number of broadcast packets transmitted. dot3StatsAlignment Errors2 A count of frames received on a particular interface that are not an integral number of octets in length and do not pass the FCS check.
Chapter 15 Performance Monitoring 15.6 15.6.4 CE-Series Ethernet Card Performance Monitoring Parameters Table 15-20 CE-Series Ether Port PM Parameters (continued) Parameter Definition etherStatsOversizePkts The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed. Note that for tagged interfaces, this number becomes 1522 bytes.
Chapter 15 Performance Monitoring 15.6 15.6.4 CE-Series Ethernet Card Performance Monitoring Parameters 15.6.4.2 CE-Series Card Ether Ports Utilization Window The Ether Ports Utilization window shows the percentage of Tx and Rx line bandwidth used by the Ethernet ports during consecutive time segments. The Utilization window provides an Interval drop-down list that enables you to set time intervals of 1 minute, 15 minutes, 1 hour, and 1 day.
Chapter 15 Performance Monitoring 15.6 15.6.4 CE-Series Ethernet Card Performance Monitoring Parameters Table 15-21 CE-Series Card POS Ports Parameters (continued) Parameter gfpStatsTxFrame Definition 2 Number of transmitted GFP frames. gfpStatsRxCRCErrors Number of packets received with a payload FCS error. gfpStatsRxOctets2 Number of GFP bytes received. gfpStatsTxOctets 2 Number of GFP bytes transmitted. gfpStatsRxSBitErrors Sum of all the single bit errors.
Chapter 15 Performance Monitoring 15.7 15.7 Performance Monitoring for Optical Cards 15.7 Performance Monitoring for Optical Cards This section lists PM parameters for ONS 15454 optical cards, including the OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, and OC-192 cards. Figure 15-20 shows the signal types that support near-end and far-end PMs.
Chapter 15 Performance Monitoring 15.7 15.7 Performance Monitoring for Optical Cards Table 15-22 and Table 15-23 list the PM parameters for OC-3 cards. Table 15-22 OC-3 Card PMs Section (NE) Line (NE) STS Path (NE) Line (FE) STS Path (FE)1 CV-S ES-S SES-S SEF-S CV-L ES-L SES-L UAS-L FC-L PSC (1+1) PSD (1+1) CV-P ES-P SES-P UAS-P FC-P PPJC-PDET NPJC-PDET PPJC-PGEN NPJC-PGEN PPJC-PDET-P PPJC-PGEN-P PJC-DIFF CV-LFE ES-LFE SES-LFE UAS-LFE FC-LFE CV-PFE ES-PFE SES-PFE UAS-PFE FC-PFE 1.
Chapter 15 Performance Monitoring 15.8 15.
Chapter 15 Performance Monitoring 15.9 15.9 Performance Monitoring for Storage Access Networking Cards Figure 15-22 PM Read Points for the MRC-12 Card XC Card ONS 15454 MRC-12/MRC-2.
Chapter 15 Performance Monitoring 15.9 15.9.1 FC_MR-4 Statistics Window CTC provides FC_MR-4 performance information, including line-level parameters, port bandwidth consumption, and historical statistics. The FC_MR-4 card performance information is divided into the Statistics, Utilization, and History tabbed windows within the card view Performance tab window. 15.9.1 FC_MR-4 Statistics Window The Statistics window lists parameters at the line level.
Chapter 15 Performance Monitoring 15.9 15.9.2 FC_MR-4 Utilization Window Table 15-27 FC_MR-4 Statistics Parameters (continued) Parameter Definition gfpStatsRxDistanceExtBuffers Number of buffer credit received for GFP-T receiver (valid only if distance extension is enabled). gfpStatsTxDistanceExtBuffers Number of buffer credit transmitted for GFP-T transmitter (valid only if distance extension is enabled).
Chapter 15 Performance Monitoring 15.9 15.9.3 FC_MR-4 History Window Note Line utilization numbers express the average of ingress and egress traffic as a percentage of capacity. 15.9.3 FC_MR-4 History Window The History window lists past FC_MR-4 statistics for the previous time intervals. Depending on the selected time interval, the History window displays the statistics for each port for the number of previous time intervals as shown in Table 15-29.
CH A P T E R 16 SNMP This chapter explains Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) as implemented by the Cisco ONS 15454. For SNMP setup information, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide. Chapter topics include: • 16.1 SNMP Overview, page 16-1 • 16.2 Basic SNMP Components, page 16-2 • 16.3 SNMP External Interface Requirement, page 16-4 • 16.4 SNMP Version Support, page 16-4 • 16.5 SNMP Message Types, page 16-4 • 16.6 SNMP Management Information Bases, page 16-5 • 16.
Chapter 16 SNMP 16.2 16.2 Basic SNMP Components Note It is recommended that the SNMP Manager timeout value be set to 60 seconds. Under certain conditions, if this value is lower than the recommended time, the TCC card can reset. However, the response time depends on various parameters such as object being queried, complexity, and number of hops in the node, etc. Note The CERENT-MSDWDM-MIB.mib, CERENT-FC-MIB.mib, and CERENT-GENERIC-PM-MIB.
Chapter 16 SNMP 16.2 16.2 Basic SNMP Components Figure 16-2 Example of the Primary SNMP Components Management Entity NMS Agent Agent Management Database Management Database Management Database 33930 Agent Managed Devices An agent (such as SNMP) residing on each managed device translates local management information data, such as performance information or event and error information caught in software traps, into a readable form for the management system.
Chapter 16 SNMP 16.3 16.3 SNMP External Interface Requirement 16.3 SNMP External Interface Requirement Since all SNMP requests come from a third-party application, the only external interface requirement is that a third-part SNMP client application can upload RFC 3273 SNMP MIB variables in the etherStatsHighCapacityTable, etherHistoryHighCapacityTable, or mediaIndependentTable. 16.4 SNMP Version Support The ONS 15454 supports SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c traps and get requests.
Chapter 16 SNMP 16.6 16.6 SNMP Management Information Bases 16.6 SNMP Management Information Bases Section 16.6.1 lists IETF-standard MIBs that are implemented in the ONS 15454 and shows their compilation order. Section 16.6.2 lists proprietary MIBs for the ONS 15454 and shows their compilation order. Section 16.6.3 contains information about the generic threshold and performance monitoring MIBs that can be used to monitor any network element (NE) contained in the network. 16.6.
Chapter 16 SNMP 16.6 16.6.2 Proprietary ONS 15454 MIBs Table 16-2 IETF Standard MIBs Implemented in the ONS 15454 System (continued) RFC1 Number Module Name Title/Comments 2674 P-BRIDGE-MIB-rfc2674.mib Q-BRIDGE-MIB-rfc2674.
Chapter 16 SNMP 16.6 16.6.3 Generic Threshold and Performance Monitoring MIBs 16.6.3 Generic Threshold and Performance Monitoring MIBs In Release 7.0, a MIB called CERENT-GENERIC-PM-MIB allows network management stations (NMS) to use a single, generic MIB for accessing threshold and performance monitoring data of different interface types. The MIB is generic in the sense that it is not tied to any particular kind of interface.
Chapter 16 SNMP 16.7 16.7 SNMP Trap Content The cerentGenericPmStatsCurrentTable validates the current PM value using the cerentGenericPmStatsCurrentValid object and registers the number of valid intervals with historical PM statistics in the cerentGenericPmStatsCurrentValidIntervals object. PM values are provided in 64-bit and 32-bit formats. The 64-bit values in cerentGenericPmStatsCurrentHCValue can be used with agents that support SNMPv2.
Chapter 16 SNMP 16.7 16.7.1 Generic and IETF Traps • Object IDs that uniquely identify each event with information about the generating entity (the slot or port; synchronous transport signal [STS] and Virtual Tributary [VT]; bidirectional line switched ring [BLSR], Spanning Tree Protocol [STP], etc.). • Severity and service effect of the alarm (critical, major, minor, or event; service-affecting or non-service-affecting). • Date and time stamp showing when the alarm occurred. 16.7.
Chapter 16 SNMP 16.7 16.7.2 Variable Trap Bindings 16.7.2 Variable Trap Bindings Each SNMP trap contains variable bindings that are used to create the MIB tables. ONS 15454 traps and variable bindings are listed in Table 16-8. For each group (such as Group A), all traps within the group are associated with all of its variable bindings.
Chapter 16 SNMP 16.7 16.7.2 Variable Trap Bindings Table 16-8 Group ONS 15454 SNMPv2 Trap Variable Bindings (continued) Variable Trap Name(s) Associated Binding with Number SNMPv2 Variable Bindings Description (4) cerent454AlarmState The alarm severity and service-affecting status. Severities are Minor, Major, and Critical. Service-affecting statuses are Service-Affecting and Non-Service Affecting. (5) snmpTrapAddress The address of the SNMP trap.
Chapter 16 SNMP 16.7 16.7.2 Variable Trap Bindings Table 16-8 Group D1 (cont.) D2 ONS 15454 SNMPv2 Trap Variable Bindings (continued) Variable Trap Name(s) Associated Binding with Number SNMPv2 Variable Bindings Description (5) alarmRisingThreshold When the current sampled value is greater than or equal to this threshold, and the value at the last sampling interval was less than this threshold, a single event is generated.
Chapter 16 SNMP 16.7 16.7.2 Variable Trap Bindings Table 16-8 Group ONS 15454 SNMPv2 Trap Variable Bindings (continued) Variable Trap Name(s) Associated Binding with Number D2 (cont.) E failureDetectedExternal ToTheNE (from CERENT-454-mib) SNMPv2 Variable Bindings Description (7) cerent454AlarmState The alarm severity and service-affecting status. Severities are Minor, Major, and Critical. Service-affecting statuses are Service-Affecting and Non-Service Affecting.
Chapter 16 SNMP 16.7 16.7.2 Variable Trap Bindings Table 16-8 Group ONS 15454 SNMPv2 Trap Variable Bindings (continued) Variable Trap Name(s) Associated Binding with Number E (cont.) F performanceMonitor ThresholdCrossingAlert (from CERENT-454-mib) SNMPv2 Variable Bindings Description (9) cerent454AlarmAdditionalInfo Additional information for the alarm object. In the current version of the MIB, this object contains provisioned description for alarms that are external to the NE.
Chapter 16 SNMP 16.7 16.7.2 Variable Trap Bindings Table 16-8 Group ONS 15454 SNMPv2 Trap Variable Bindings (continued) Variable Trap Name(s) Associated Binding with Number F (cont.) G All other traps (from CERENT-454-MIB) not listed above SNMPv2 Variable Bindings Description (10) cerent454ThresholdLocation Indicates whether the event occurred at the near or far end. (11) cerent454ThresholdPeriod Indicates the sampling interval period.
Chapter 16 SNMP 16.8 16.8 SNMP Community Names Table 16-8 Group G (cont.) ONS 15454 SNMPv2 Trap Variable Bindings (continued) Variable Trap Name(s) Associated Binding with Number SNMPv2 Variable Bindings Description (8) cerent454AlarmObjectName The TL1-style user-visible name that uniquely identifies an object in the system. (9) snmpTrapAddress The address of the SNMP trap. 16.8 SNMP Community Names Community names are used to group SNMP trap destinations.
Chapter 16 SNMP 16.10 16.10.1 64-Bit RMON Monitoring over DCC Certain statistics measured on the ML card are mapped to standard MIB if one exists else mapped to a non standard MIB variable. The naming convention used by the standarad/non-standard MIB is not the same as the statistics variable used by the card. Hence when these statistics are obtained via get-reques/get-next-request/SNMP Trap they don’t match the name used on the card or as seen by CTC/TL1.
Chapter 16 SNMP 16.10 16.10.2 HC-RMON-MIB Support 16.10.1.2 Row Creation in cMediaIndependentHistoryControlTable SNMP row creation and deletion for the cMediaIndependentHistoryControlTable follows the same processes as for the MediaIndependentTable; only the variables differ.
Chapter 16 SNMP 16.10 16.10.4 History Control RMON Group 16.10.3.2 Get Requests and GetNext Requests Get requests and getNext requests for the etherStatsMulticastPkts and etherStatsBroadcastPkts columns return a value of zero because the variables are not supported by ONS 15454 Ethernet cards. 16.10.3.3 Row Deletion in etherStatsTable To delete a row in the etherStatsTable, the SetRequest PDU should contain an etherStatsStatus “invalid” value (4). The OID marks the row for deletion.
Chapter 16 SNMP 16.10 16.10.
Chapter 16 SNMP 16.10 16.10.6 Alarm RMON Group 16.10.6.1 Alarm Table The NMS uses the alarmTable to determine and provision network performance alarmable thresholds. 16.10.6.2 Row Creation in alarmTable To create a row in the alarmTable, the SetRequest PDU must be able to create the row in one single-set operation. All OIDs in the SetRequest PDU should be type OID.0 type for entry creation. The table has a maximum number of 256 rows.
Chapter 16 SNMP 16.10 16.10.6 Alarm RMON Group Table 16-10 OIDs Supported in the AlarmTable (continued) No. Column Name OID Status 13 Dot3StatsFCSErrors {1.3.6.1.2.1.10.7.2.1.3} — 14 Dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames {1.3.6.1.2.1.10.7.2.1.4} — 15 Dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrames {1.3.6.1.2.1.10.7.2.1.5} — 16 Dot3StatsDeferredTransmissions {1.3.6.1.2.1.10.7.2.1.7} — 17 Dot3StatsLateCollisions {1.3.6.1.2.1.10.7.2.1.8} — 18 Dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions {13.6.1.2.1.10.7.2.1.
Chapter 16 SNMP 16.10 16.10.7 Event RMON Group 16.10.7 Event RMON Group The Event group controls event generation and notification. It consists of two tables: the eventTable, which is a read-only list of events to be generated, and the logTable, which is a writable set of data describing a logged event. The ONS 15454 implements the logTable as specified in RFC 2819. 16.10.7.1 Event Table The eventTable is read-only and unprovisionable.
Chapter 16 SNMP 16.10 16.10.7 Event RMON Group Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.
A P P E N D I X A Hardware Specifications Note The terms "Unidirectional Path Switched Ring" and "UPSR" may appear in Cisco literature. These terms do not refer to using Cisco ONS 15xxx products in a unidirectional path switched ring configuration. Rather, these terms, as well as "Path Protected Mesh Network" and "PPMN," refer generally to Cisco's path protection feature, which may be used in any topological network configuration.
Appendix A Hardware Specifications A.1 A.1.3 Cisco Transport Controller • Regenerator mode • Hubbed rings • Multihubbed rings • Point-to-point • Linear • Linear with optical add/drop multiplexing (OADM) A.1.3 Cisco Transport Controller CTC, the ONS 15454 craft interface software, has the following specifications: • 10BaseT • TCC2/TCC2P access: RJ-45 connector • Backplane access: LAN pin field A.1.
Appendix A Hardware Specifications A.1 A.1.8 EIA Interface • Backplane access: Alarm pin fields A.1.8 EIA Interface The ONS 15454 EIA interface has the following specifications: • SMB: AMP #415504-3 75-ohm, 4-leg connectors • BNC: Trompeter #UCBJ224 75-ohm 4 leg connector (King and ITT are also compatible) • AMP Champ: AMP#552246-1 with #552562-2 bail locks A.1.
Appendix A Hardware Specifications A.2 A.1.13 Dimensions • Operating humidity: 5 to 95 percent, noncondensing A.1.13 Dimensions The ONS 15454 shelf assembly has the following dimensions: • Height: 18.5 in. (40.7 cm) • Width: 19 or 23 in. (41.8 or 50.6 cm) with mounting ears attached • Depth: 12 in. (26.4 cm) (5 in. or 12.7 cm projection from rack) • Weight: 55 lb (24.947 kg) empty A.
Appendix A Hardware Specifications A.2 A.2 SFP, XFP, and GBIC Specifications Table A-1 SFP, XFP, and GBIC Specifications (continued) Transmitter Output Receiver Input Power Power Min/Max (dBm) Min/Max (dBm) SFP/XFP Product ID Interface 15454-SFP-GE+-LX=/ 15454E-SFP-GE+-LX= FC (1 and 2 Gbps), FICON, GE, HDTV –9.5 to –3 –20 to –3 (1 FC, 1GE, and 2 FC) ONS-SE-200-MM= ESCON –20.5 to –15 –14 to –291 ONS-SE-G2F-SX= Fibre Channel (1 and 2 Gbps), GE –9.5 to 0 (GE) –10 to –3.
Appendix A Hardware Specifications A.3 A.3 General Card Specifications Table A-1 SFP, XFP, and GBIC Specifications (continued) SFP/XFP Product ID Interface Transmitter Output Receiver Input Power Power Min/Max (dBm) Min/Max (dBm) 15454E-GBIC-LX/LH GE, FC –9 to –3 –19 to –3 ONS-GX-2FC-MMI FC –9.5 to –5 –20.5/–15 max ONS-GX-2FC-SML FC –9 to –3 –18 to –3 1. Based on any valid 8B/10B code pattern measured at, or extrapolated to, 10E-15 BER measured at center of eye 2.
Appendix A Hardware Specifications A.3 A.3.1 Power Table A-2 Individual Card Power Requirements (continued) Card Type Card Name Watts Amperes BTU/Hr. Electrical Cards EC1-12 36.60 0.76 124.88 DS1-14 12.60 0.26 43.0 DS1N-14 12.60 0.26 43.0 DS1/E1-56 36.00 0.75 122.84 DS3-12 38.20 0.79 130.34 DS3/EC1-48 45 0.94 153.6 DS3N-12 38.20 0.79 130.34 DS3i-N-12 30 0.63 102.4 DS3-12E 26 0.54 88.7 DS3N-12E 38.2 0.79 130.34 DS3XM-12 34 0.71 116.01 DS3XM-6 20 0.
Appendix A Hardware Specifications A.3 A.3.2 Temperature Table A-2 Individual Card Power Requirements (continued) Card Type Card Name Watts Amperes BTU/Hr. Ethernet Cards E100T-12 65 1.35 221.79 E100T-G 65 1.35 221.79 E1000-2 53.50 1.11 182.55 E1000-2-G 53.50 1.11 182.55 G1K-4 62.4 (including GBICs2) 1.30 212.92 ML100T-12 43.2 0.90 147.40 ML1000-2 57.6 (including SFPs) 1.20 196.54 ML100X-8 65 1.35 221.79 CE-100T-8 53.14 1.11 181.32 CE-1000-4 60 1.25 204.
Appendix A Hardware Specifications A.3 A.3.
Appendix A Hardware Specifications A.4 A.4 Common Control Card Specifications Table A-3 Card Temperature Ranges and Product Names (continued) Card Type Card Name C-Temp Product Name (32 to 131 degrees Fahrenheit, 0 to +55 degrees Celsius) Optical OC 192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 15454-OC192IO1310 — OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 15454-OC192IR1550 — OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 15454-OC192LR1550 — OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.
Appendix A Hardware Specifications A.4 A.4.2 TCC2P Card Specifications – Interface: EIA/TIA-232 (local craft access, on TCC2 faceplate) – Interface: 10BaseT LAN (on TCC2 faceplate) – Interface: 10BaseT LAN (through the backplane) • Synchronization – Stratum 3, per Telcordia GR-253-CORE – Free running access: Accuracy +/– 4.6 ppm – Holdover stability: 3.
Appendix A Hardware Specifications A.4 A.4.3 XCVT Card Specifications – Undervoltage: Major alarm – Overvoltage: Major alarm • Environmental – Operating temperature: –40 to +149 degrees Fahrenheit (–40 to +65 degrees Celsius) – Operating humidity: 5 to 95 percent, noncondensing • Dimensions – Height: 12.650 in. (321.3 mm) – Width: 0.716 in. (18.2 mm) – Depth: 9.000 in. (228.6 mm) – Depth with backplane connector: 9.250 in. (235 mm) – Weight not including clam shell: 1.5 lb (0.7 kg) A.4.
Appendix A Hardware Specifications A.4 A.4.5 XC-VXC-10G Card Specifications A.4.5 XC-VXC-10G Card Specifications The XC-VXC-10G card has the following specifications: • Environmental – Operating temperature: I-Temp (15454-XC-VXC-10G-T): –40 to 149 degrees Fahrenheit (–40 to +65 degrees Celsius) – Operating humidity: 5 to 85 percent, noncondensing • Dimensions – Height: 12.650 in. (321.3 mm) – Width: 0.716 in. (18.2 mm) – Depth: 9.000 in. (228.6 mm) – Card weight: 1.5 lb (0.6 kg) A.4.
Appendix A Hardware Specifications A.4 A.4.7 AEP Specifications – Dual tone multifrequency (DTMF) signaling • User data channel (UDC) – Bit rate: 64 kbps, bidirectional – ITU-T G.
Appendix A Hardware Specifications A.5 A.5 Electrical Card Specifications – Number of outputs: 16 – Switched by opto MOS – Triggered by definable alarm condition – Maximum allowed open circuit voltage: 60 VDC – Maximum allowed closed circuit current: 100 mA – Termination: 50-pin AMP champ connector • Environmental – Overvoltage protection: as in ITU-T G.
Appendix A Hardware Specifications A.5 A.5.2 DS1-14 and DS1N-14 Card Specifications – Termination: Unbalanced coaxial cable – Input impedance: 75 ohms +/–5 percent – Cable loss: Max 450 feet 734A, RG-59, 728A/Max 79 feet RG-179 – AIS: TR-TSY-000191 compliant – Power level: –1.8 +/– 5.7 dBm – Pulse shape: ANSI T1.102-1988 Figure 8 – Pulse amplitude: 0.36 to 0.85 V peak – Loopback modes: Terminal and facility – Line build out: 0 to 225 feet (0 to 68.8 meters); 226 to 450 feet (68.9 to 137.
Appendix A Hardware Specifications A.5 A.5.3 DS1/E1-56 Card Specifications – Termination: Wire-wrap, AMP Champ – Input impedance: 100 ohms – Cable loss: Max 655 feet ABAM #22 AWG – AIS: TR-TSY-000191 compliant – Power level: 12.5 to 17.9 dBm centered at 772 KHz, –16.4 to –11.1 dBm centered at 1544 KHz – Pulse shape: Telcordia GR-499-CORE Figure 9-5 – Pulse amplitude: 2.4 to 3.
Appendix A Hardware Specifications A.5 A.5.4 DS3/EC1-48 Card Specifications – Bit rate: 1.544 Mbps ± 32 ppm (DS-1); 2.048 Mbps ±50ppm (E1) – Frame format: Off, SF (D4), ESF (DS-1); E1 multiframe, E1 CRC multiframe, and unframed (ITU) (E1) – Line code: AMI, B8ZS (DS-1); HDB3 (E1) – Termination: Balanced, twisted pair, #22/24 AWG – Input impedance: 100 ohms +/– 5 percent (DS1); 120 ohms =/–5% (E1) – Cable loss: Max 655 feet ABAM #22/24 AWG (DS1); Compliant per ITU-T G.
Appendix A Hardware Specifications A.5 A.5.5 DS3-12 and DS3N-12 Card Specifications – Bit rate: 44.736 Mbps +/– 20 ppm – Frame format: DS-3 ANSI T1.107-1988 – Line code: B3ZS – Termination: Unbalanced coaxial cable – Input impedance: 75 ohms +/–5 percent – Cable loss: Max 900 feet with 734A or 728A cable, Max 79 feet with RG-179 – AIS: TR-TSY-000191 compliant – Power level: –1.8 to +5.7 dBm – Pulse shape: ANSI T1.102-1988 Figure 8 – Pulse amplitude: 0.36 to 0.
Appendix A Hardware Specifications A.5 A.5.6 DS3i-N-12 Card Specifications • Output – Bit rate: 44.736 Mbps +/– 20 ppm – Frame format: DS-3 ANSI T1.107-1988 – Line code: B3ZS – Termination: Unbalanced coaxial cable – Input impedance: 75 ohms +/–5 percent – Cable loss: Max 450 feet 734A, RG-59, 728A/Max 79 feet RG-179 – AIS: TR-TSY-000191 compliant – Power level: –1.8 to +5.7 dBm – Pulse shape: ANSI T1.102-1988 Figure 8 – Pulse amplitude: 0.36 to 0.
Appendix A Hardware Specifications A.5 A.5.7 DS3-12E and DS3N-12E Card Specifications – Termination: Unbalanced coaxial cable – Input impedance: 75 ohms +/– 5 percent – Cable loss: Maximum 137 m (450 ft): 734A, RG59, 728A Maximum 24 m (79 ft): RG179 – AIS: ITU-T G.704 compliant • Output – Bit rate: 44.736 Mbps +/– 20 ppm – Frame format: ITU-T G.704, ITU-T G.752/DS-3 ANSI T1.107-1988 – Line code: B3ZS – Termination: Unbalanced coaxial cable – Output impedance: 75 ohms +/–5 percent – AIS: ITU-T G.
Appendix A Hardware Specifications A.5 A.5.7 DS3-12E and DS3N-12E Card Specifications – Frame format: DS-3 ANSI T1.107-1988 – Line code: B3ZS – Termination: Unbalanced coaxial cable – Input impedance: 75 ohms +/–5 percent – Cable loss: Max 450 feet 734A, RG-59, 728A/Max 79 feet RG-179 – AIS: TR-TSY-000191 compliant • Output – Bit rate: 44.736 Mbps +/– 20 ppm – Frame format: DS-3 ANSI T1.
Appendix A Hardware Specifications A.5 A.5.8 DS3XM-12 Card Specifications A.5.8 DS3XM-12 Card Specifications The DS3XM-12 card has the following specifications: • Input – Bit rate: 44.736 Mbps +/–20 ppm – Frame format: DS-3 ANSI T1.107-1988 – Line code: B3ZS – Termination: Unbalanced coaxial cable – Input impedance: 75 ohms +/–5 percent – Cable loss: Max 450 feet 734A, RG-59, 728A/Max 79 feet RG-179 – AIS: TR-TSY-000191 compliant • Output – Bit rate: 44.736 Mbps +/– 20 ppm – Frame format: DS-3 ANSI T1.
Appendix A Hardware Specifications A.5 A.5.9 DS3XM-6 Card Specifications A.5.9 DS3XM-6 Card Specifications The DS3XM-6 card has the following specifications: • Input – Bit rate: 44.736 Mbps +/–20 ppm – Frame format: DS-3 ANSI T1.107-1988 – Line code: B3ZS – Termination: Unbalanced coaxial cable – Input impedance: 75 ohms +/–5 percent – Cable loss: Max 450 feet 734A, RG-59, 728A/Max 79 feet RG-179 – AIS: TR-TSY-000191 compliant • Output – Bit rate: 44.736 Mbps +/– 20 ppm – Frame format: DS-3 ANSI T1.
Appendix A Hardware Specifications A.6 A.5.10 FILLER Card Specifications A.5.10 FILLER Card Specifications The FILLER cards have the following specifications: • Environmental – Operating temperature: C-Temp: -40 to +149 degree Fahrenheit (-40 to +65 degrees Celsius) – Operating humidity: 5 to 95 percent, noncondensing • Dimensions – Height: 12.650 in. (321.3 mm) – Width: 0.716 in. (18.2 mm) – Depth: 9.000 in. (228.6 mm) – Card weight: 0.4 lb (0.19 kg) A.
Appendix A Hardware Specifications A.6 A.6.2 OC3 IR/STM1SH 1310-8 Card Specifications – Extinction Ratio: 8.2 dB – Dispersion Ratio: 96 ps/nm • Receiver – Maximum receiver level: –8 dBm at BER 1 * 10 exp – 12 – Minimum receiver level: –28 dBm at BER 1 * 10 exp – 12 – Receiver: InGaAs/InP photodetector – Link loss budget: 13 dB – Receiver input wavelength range: 1274 to 1356 nm – Jitter tolerance: Telcordia GR-253/ITU-T G.
Appendix A Hardware Specifications A.6 A.6.3 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 Card Specifications – Dispersion tolerance: 96 ps/nm • Receiver – Maximum receiver level: –8 dBm at BER 1 * 10 exp – 12 – Minimum receiver level: –28 dBm at BER 1 * 10 exp – 12 – Receiver: InGaAs/InP photodetector – Link loss budget: 13 dB – Receiver input wavelength range: 1261 to 1360 nm – Jitter tolerance: Telcordia GR-253/ITU-T G.
Appendix A Hardware Specifications A.6 A.6.4 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310 Card Specifications – Minimum receiver level: –28 dBm at BER 1 * 10 exp – 12 – Receiver: InGa As/InP photodetector – Link loss budget: 13 dB – Receiver input wavelength range: 1274 to 1356 nm – Jitter tolerance: Telcordia GR-253/ITU-T G.
Appendix A Hardware Specifications A.6 A.6.5 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 Card Specifications – Link loss budget: 25 dB – Receiver input wavelength range: 1280 to 1335 nm – Jitter tolerance: Telcordia GR-253/ITU-T G.
Appendix A Hardware Specifications A.6 A.6.6 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 Specifications • Environmental – Operating temperature: C-Temp (15454-OC121LR1550): +23 to +131 degrees Fahrenheit (–5 to +55 degrees Celsius) I-Temp (15454-OC121L15-T): –40 to +149 degrees Fahrenheit (–40 to +65 degrees Celsius) – Operating humidity: 5 to 95 percent, noncondensing • Dimensions – Height: 12.650 in. (321.3 mm) – Width: 0.716 in. (18.2 mm) – Depth: 9.000 in. (228.6 mm) – Weight not including clam shell: 1.4 lb (0.
Appendix A Hardware Specifications A.6 A.6.7 OC48 IR 1310 Card Specifications • Operating humidity – 5 to 95 percent, noncondensing • Dimensions – Height: 12.650 in. (321.3 mm) – Width: 0.716 in. (18.2 mm) – Depth: 9.000 in. (228.6 mm) – Weight not including clam shell: 1.0 lb (0.4 kg) Note Minimum transmit power, minimum receive power, and link loss budget might exceed standard specifications. A.6.
Appendix A Hardware Specifications A.6 A.6.8 OC48 LR 1550 Card Specifications – Height: 12.650 in. (321.3 mm) – Width: 0.716 in. (18.2 mm) – Depth: 9.000 in. (228.6 mm) – Weight not including clam shell: 1.8 lb (0.8 kg) A.6.8 OC48 LR 1550 Card Specifications The OC48 LR 1550 card has the following specifications: • Line – Bit rate: 2.
Appendix A Hardware Specifications A.6 A.6.9 OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 Card Specifications A.6.9 OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 Card Specifications The OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 card has the following specifications: • Line – Bit rate: 2.49 Gbps – Code: Scrambled NRZ – Fiber: 1310-nm single-mode – Loopback modes: Terminal and facility – Connectors: SC – Compliance: Telcordia GR-253-CORE, ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.
Appendix A Hardware Specifications A.6 A.6.11 OC48 ELR/STM 16 EH 100 GHz Card Specifications – Bit rate: 2.49 Gbps – Code: Scrambled NRZ – Fiber: 1550-nm single-mode – Loopback modes: Terminal and facility – Connectors: SC – Compliance: Telcordia GR-253-CORE, ITU-T G.707, ITU-T G.
Appendix A Hardware Specifications A.6 A.6.12 OC48 ELR 200 GHz Card Specifications – Connectors: SC – Compliance: Telcordia GR-253-CORE, ITU-T G.692, ITU-T G.958 • Transmitter – Maximum transmitter output power: 0 dBm – Minimum transmitter output power: –2 dBm – Center wavelength accuracy: +/– 0.
Appendix A Hardware Specifications A.6 A.6.13 OC192 SR/STM64 IO 1310 Card Specifications – Center wavelength accuracy: +/– 0.25 nm – Transmitter: Electro-absorption laser – Dispersion tolerance: 3600 ps/nm • Receiver – Maximum receiver level: –8 dBm – Minimum receiver level: –28 dBm – Receiver: InGaAs APD photodetector – Link loss budget: 26 dB minimum, with 1 dB dispersion penalty – Receiver input wavelength range: 1520 to 1580 nm – Jitter tolerance: Telcordia GR-253/ITU-T G.
Appendix A Hardware Specifications A.6 A.6.14 OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 Card Specifications – Maximum receiver level: –1 dBm at BER 1 * 10 exp – 12 – Minimum receiver level: –11 dBm at BER 1 * 10 exp – 12 – Receiver: PIN diode – Link loss budget: 5 dB minimum, plus 1 dB dispersion penalty at BER = 1 * 10 exp – 12 including dispersion – Receiver input wavelength range: 1290 to 1330 nm – Dispersion tolerance: 6.
Appendix A Hardware Specifications A.6 A.6.
Appendix A Hardware Specifications A.6 A.6.16 OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.
Appendix A Hardware Specifications A.6 A.6.16 OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 15xx.xx Card Specifications In deployments without a DCU: +/– 1200 ps/nm, with OSNR of 23 dB (0.5 nm RBW) – Loopback modes: Terminal and facility Note You must use a 20-dB fiber attenuator (15 to 25 dB) when working with the OC192 LR/STM64 LH 15xx.xx card in a loopback. Do not use fiber loopbacks with the OC192 LR/STM64 LH 15xx.xx card. Using fiber loopbacks causes irreparable damage to this card.
Appendix A Hardware Specifications A.6 A.6.17 15454_MRC-12 Card Specifications – 1538.98 +/– 0.040 nm, OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 1538.98 – 1539.77 +/– 0.040 nm, OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 1539.77 – 1540.56 +/– 0.040 nm, OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 1540.56 ITU grid red band: – 1550.12 +/– 0.040 nm, OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 1550.12 – 1550.92 +/– 0.040 nm, OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 1550.92 – 1551.72 +/– 0.040 nm, OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 1551.72 – 1552.52 +/– 0.040 nm, OC192 LR/STM64 LH ITU 1552.52 – 1554.13 +/– 0.
Appendix A Hardware Specifications A.6 A.6.18 OC192SR1/STM64IO Short Reach Card Specifications – Receiver: PIN PD – Receiver input wavelength range: Depends on SFP • Environmental – Operating temperature: –40 to +149 degrees Fahrenheit (–40 to +65 degrees Celsius) – Operating humidity: 5 to 95 percent, noncondensing • Dimensions – Height: 12.650 in. (321.3 mm) – Width: 0.716 in. (18.2 mm) – Depth: 9.000 in. (228.6 mm) – Depth with backplane connector: 9.250 in.
Appendix A Hardware Specifications A.6 A.6.19 OC192/STM64 Any Reach Card Specifications – Operating humidity: 5 to 95 percent, noncondensing • Dimensions – Height: 12.650 in. (321.3 mm) – Width: 0.716 in. (18.2 mm) – Depth: 9.000 in. (228.6 mm) – Depth with backplane connector: 9.250 in. (235 mm) – Weight not including clam shell: 3.1 lb (1.3 kg) A.6.19 OC192/STM64 Any Reach Card Specifications Note The OC192/STM64 Any Reach card is designated as OC192-XFP in CTC.
Appendix A Hardware Specifications A.7 A.7 Ethernet Card Specifications A.7 Ethernet Card Specifications This section includes specifications for the E100T-12, E100T-G, E1000-2, E1000-2-G, CE-1000-4, CE-100T-8, G1K-4, ML100T-12, ML1000-2, and ML100X-8 cards. For compliance information, refer to the Cisco Optical Transport Products Safety and Compliance Information document. A.7.
Appendix A Hardware Specifications A.7 A.7.4 E1000-2-G Card Specifications – Operating humidity: 5 to 95 percent, noncondensing • Dimensions – Height: 12.650 in. (321.3 mm) – Width: 0.716 in. (18.2 mm) – Depth: 9.000 in. (228.6 mm) – Card weight: 2.1 lb (0.9 kg) A.7.
Appendix A Hardware Specifications A.7 A.7.7 G1K-4 Card Specifications – Operating humidity: 0 to 95 percent, noncondensing • Dimensions – Height: 12.650 in. (321.3 mm) – Width: 0.913 in. (23.19 mm) – Depth: 9.073 in. (230.45 mm) – Card weight: 1.8 lb (0.82 kg) A.7.
Appendix A Hardware Specifications A.8 A.7.10 ML100X-8 Card Specifications – Operating humidity: 5 to 95 percent, noncondensing • Dimensions – Height: 12.650 in. (321.3 mm) – Width: 0.716 in. (18.2 mm) – Depth: 9.000 in. (228.6 mm) – Depth with backplane connector: 9.250 in. (235 mm) – Weight not including clam shell: 0.9 kg (2.1 lb) A.7.
Appendix A Hardware Specifications A.8 A.8.
A P P E N D I X B Administrative and Service States This appendix describes administrative and service states for Cisco ONS 15454 cards, ports, and cross-connects. For circuit state information, refer to Chapter 11, “Circuits and Tunnels.” Entity states in Software Release 5.0 and later are based on the generic state model defined in Telcordia GR-1093-CORE, Issue 2 and ITU-T X.731. B.
Appendix B Administrative and Service States B.2 B.2 Administrative States Table B-2 ONS 15454 Secondary States Secondary State Definition AINS (Automatic In-Service) The entity is delayed before transitioning to the IS-NR service state. The transition to IS-NR depends on the correction of conditions, or on a soak timer. Alarm reporting is suppressed, but traffic is carried.
Appendix B Administrative and Service States B.3 B.3 Service State Transitions Table B-3 ONS 15454 Administrative States Administrative State (PST,SST) Definition IS Puts the entity in service. IS,AINS Puts the entity in automatic in-service. OOS,DSBLD Removes the entity from service and disables it. OOS,MT Removes the entity from service for maintenance. OOS,OOG (VCAT circuits only) Removes a VCAT cross-connect cross-connect from service and from the group of members.
Appendix B Administrative and Service States B.3 B.3.1 Card Service State Transitions Table B-4 ONS 15454 Card Service State Transitions (continued) Current Service State Action Next Service State OOS-AU,AINS & SWDL Restart completed. IS-NR Remove the card. OOS-AU,AINS & UEQ Insert a valid card. OOS-AU,AINS & SWDL Insert an invalid card. OOS-AU,AINS & MEA Delete the card. OOS-AUMA,UAS & UEQ Remove the card. OOS-AU,UEQ Delete the card.
Appendix B Administrative and Service States B.3 B.3.2 Port and Cross-Connect Service State Transitions Table B-4 ONS 15454 Card Service State Transitions (continued) Current Service State Action Next Service State OOS-AUMA,MEA & UAS Remove the card. OOS-AUMA,UAS & UEQ Provision the card. OOS-AU,MEA Restart completed. OOS-MA,MT Remove the card. OOS-AUMA,MT & UEQ Change the administrative state to IS. OOS-AU,UEQ Insert a valid card. OOS-AUMA,MT & SWDL Insert an invalid card.
Appendix B Administrative and Service States B.3 B.3.2 Port and Cross-Connect Service State Transitions Table B-5 ONS 15454 Port and Cross-Connect Service State Transitions Current Service State Action Next Service State IS-NR Put the port or cross-connect in the OOS,MT administrative state. OOS-MA,MT Put the port or cross-connect in the OOS,DSBLD administrative state. OOS-MA,DSBLD Put the port or cross-connect in the IS,AINS administrative state.
Appendix B Administrative and Service States B.3 B.3.2 Port and Cross-Connect Service State Transitions Table B-5 ONS 15454 Port and Cross-Connect Service State Transitions (continued) Current Service State Action Next Service State OOS-AU,AINS & FLT & Alarm/condition is cleared.
Appendix B Administrative and Service States B.3 B.3.2 Port and Cross-Connect Service State Transitions Table B-5 ONS 15454 Port and Cross-Connect Service State Transitions (continued) Current Service State Action Next Service State OOS-AUMA,FLT & LPBK & MT & OOG Release the loopback. OOS-AUMA,FLT & MT & OOG Alarm/condition is cleared. OOS-MT,MT & OOG OOS-AUMA,FLT & MT Alarm/condition is cleared. OOS-MA,MT Put the port or cross-connect in the IS administrative state.
Appendix B Administrative and Service States B.3 B.3.2 Port and Cross-Connect Service State Transitions Table B-5 ONS 15454 Port and Cross-Connect Service State Transitions (continued) Current Service State Action Next Service State OOS-MA,DSBLD Put the port or cross-connect in the IS administrative state. IS-NR Put the port or cross-connect in the IS,AINS administrative state. OOS-AU,AINS Put the port or cross-connect in the OOS,MT administrative state.
Appendix B Administrative and Service States B.3 B.3.2 Port and Cross-Connect Service State Transitions Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R7.
A P P E N D I X C Network Element Defaults Note The terms "Unidirectional Path Switched Ring" and "UPSR" may appear in Cisco literature. These terms do not refer to using Cisco ONS 15xxx products in a unidirectional path switched ring configuration. Rather, these terms, as well as "Path Protected Mesh Network" and "PPMN," refer generally to Cisco's path protection feature, which may be used in any topological network configuration.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2 Card Default Settings settings except those relating to protection (1+1 bidirectional switching, 1+1 reversion time, 1+1 revertive switching, bidirectional line switched ring [BLSR] ring reversion time, BLSR ring revertive switching, BLSR span reversion time, and BLSR span revertive switching), which apply to subsequent provisioning.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.2 Threshold Defaults • Port—(FC_MR-4 cards only) Port line-level configuration, distance extension, and enhanced FC/FICON ISL settings. • Card—(DS1/E1-56, ML-series, and FC_MR-4 cards) Transport mode, operating mode, enable/disable retiming, and port to Virtual Tributary (VT) mapping standard settings (DS1/E1-56 only); or FC_MR-4 card mode settings (FC_MR-4 only); or framing mode (ML-series cards).
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Threshold defaults are defined for near end and/or far end, at 15-minute and one-day intervals. Thresholds are further broken down by type, such as Section, Line, STS, or VT for performance monitoring (PM) thresholds, and TCA (warning) or Alarm for physical thresholds. PM threshold types define the layer to which the threshold applies. Physical threshold types define the level of response expected when the threshold is crossed.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-1 DS-1 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain DS1.pmthresholds.line.nearend.1day.CV 133400 (BPV count) 0 - 133315200 DS1.pmthresholds.line.nearend.1day.ES 648 (seconds) 0 - 86400 DS1.pmthresholds.line.nearend.1day.LOSS 10 (seconds) 0 - 86400 DS1.pmthresholds.line.nearend.1day.SES 100 (seconds) 0 - 86400 DS1.pmthresholds.path.farend.15min.CSS 25 (seconds) 0 - 900 DS1.pmthresholds.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-1 DS-1 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain DS1.pmthresholds.sts.farend.15min.CV 15 (B3 count) 0 - 2160000 DS1.pmthresholds.sts.farend.15min.ES 12 (seconds) 0 - 900 DS1.pmthresholds.sts.farend.15min.FC 10 (count) 0 - 72 DS1.pmthresholds.sts.farend.15min.SES 3 (seconds) 0 - 900 DS1.pmthresholds.sts.farend.15min.UAS 10 (seconds) 0 - 900 DS1.pmthresholds.sts.farend.1day.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card C.2.3.2 DS1/E1-56 Card Default Settings Table C-2 lists the DS1/E1-56 card default settings. Table C-2 DS1/E1-56 Card Default Settings Default Name Default Value Default Domain DS1-E1-56.config.OperatingMode All DS1 All DS1, All E1 DS1-E1-56.config.PortToVtMappingMode GR253 Industry when OperatingMode All E1; GR253, Industry when OperatingMode All DS1 DS1-E1-56.config.RetimingEnabled FALSE TRUE, FALSE DS1-E1-56.DS1-PORT.config.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-2 DS1/E1-56 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain DS1-E1-56.DS1-PORT.pmthresholds.ds1network.farend.15min.SESNE 10 (seconds) 0 - 900 DS1-E1-56.DS1-PORT.pmthresholds.ds1network.farend.15min.UASFE 10 (seconds) 0 - 900 DS1-E1-56.DS1-PORT.pmthresholds.ds1network.farend.15min.UASNE 10 (seconds) 0 - 900 DS1-E1-56.DS1-PORT.pmthresholds.ds1network.farend.1day.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-2 DS1/E1-56 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain DS1-E1-56.DS1-PORT.pmthresholds.path.farend.1day.CV 132960 (BIP 0 - 27561600 count) DS1-E1-56.DS1-PORT.pmthresholds.path.farend.1day.ES 648 (seconds) 0 - 86400 DS1-E1-56.DS1-PORT.pmthresholds.path.farend.1day.ESA 25 (seconds) 0 - 86400 DS1-E1-56.DS1-PORT.pmthresholds.path.farend.1day.ESB 25 (seconds) 0 - 86400 DS1-E1-56.DS1-PORT.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-2 DS1/E1-56 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain DS1-E1-56.DS1-PORT.pmthresholds.sts.farend.1day.SES 7 (seconds) 0 - 86400 DS1-E1-56.DS1-PORT.pmthresholds.sts.farend.1day.UAS 10 (seconds) 0 - 86400 DS1-E1-56.DS1-PORT.pmthresholds.sts.nearend.15min.ES 12 (seconds) 0 - 900 DS1-E1-56.DS1-PORT.pmthresholds.sts.nearend.15min.FC 10 (count) 0 - 72 DS1-E1-56.DS1-PORT.pmthresholds.sts.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-2 DS1/E1-56 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain DS1-E1-56.E1-PORT.config.SaBit SA Bit 4 SA Bit 4, SA Bit 5, SA Bit 6, SA Bit 7, SA Bit 8 DS1-E1-56.E1-PORT.config.SDBER 1E-7 1E-5, 1E-6, 1E-7, 1E-8, 1E-9 DS1-E1-56.E1-PORT.config.SendDoNotUse FALSE TRUE, FALSE DS1-E1-56.E1-PORT.config.SFBER 1E-4 1E-3, 1E-4, 1E-5 DS1-E1-56.E1-PORT.config.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-2 DS1/E1-56 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain DS1-E1-56.E1-PORT.pmthresholds.sts.farend.1day.ES 100 (seconds) 0 - 86400 DS1-E1-56.E1-PORT.pmthresholds.sts.farend.1day.FC 40 (count) 0 - 6912 DS1-E1-56.E1-PORT.pmthresholds.sts.farend.1day.SES 7 (seconds) 0 - 86400 DS1-E1-56.E1-PORT.pmthresholds.sts.farend.1day.UAS 10 (seconds) 0 - 86400 DS1-E1-56.E1-PORT.pmthresholds.sts.nearend.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card C.2.3.3 DS-3 Card Default Settings Table C-3 lists the DS-3 card default settings. Table C-3 DS-3 Card Default Settings Default Name Default Value Default Domain DS3.config.AINSSoakTime 08:00 (hours:mins) 00:00, 00:15, 00:30 .. 48:00 DS3.config.LineLength 0 - 225 ft 0 - 225 ft, 226 - 450 ft DS3.config.SDBER 1E-7 1E-5, 1E-6, 1E-7, 1E-8, 1E-9 DS3.config.SFBER 1E-4 1E-3, 1E-4, 1E-5 DS3.config.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-3 DS-3 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain DS3.pmthresholds.sts.nearend.1day.SES 7 (seconds) 0 - 86400 DS3.pmthresholds.sts.nearend.1day.UAS 10 (seconds) 0 - 86400 C.2.3.4 DS3/EC1-48 Card Default Settings Table C-4 lists the DS3/EC1-48 card default settings. Table C-4 DS3/EC1-48 Card Default Settings Default Name Default Value Default Domain DS3-EC1-48.Broadband.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-4 DS3/EC1-48 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain DS3-EC1-48.DS3-PORT.pmthresholds.cpbitpath.nearend.15min.SAS 2 (seconds) 0 - 900 DS3-EC1-48.DS3-PORT.pmthresholds.cpbitpath.nearend.15min.SES 4 (seconds) 0 - 900 DS3-EC1-48.DS3-PORT.pmthresholds.cpbitpath.nearend.15min.UAS 10 (seconds) 0 - 900 DS3-EC1-48.DS3-PORT.pmthresholds.cpbitpath.nearend.1day.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-4 DS3/EC1-48 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain DS3-EC1-48.DS3-PORT.pmthresholds.sts.farend.15min.SES 3 (seconds) 0 - 900 DS3-EC1-48.DS3-PORT.pmthresholds.sts.farend.15min.UAS 10 (seconds) 0 - 900 DS3-EC1-48.DS3-PORT.pmthresholds.sts.farend.1day.CV 125 (G1 count) 0 - 207360000 DS3-EC1-48.DS3-PORT.pmthresholds.sts.farend.1day.ES 100 (seconds) 0 - 86400 DS3-EC1-48.DS3-PORT.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-4 DS3/EC1-48 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain DS3-EC1-48.EC1-PORT.pmthresholds.line.farend.1day.SES 4 (seconds) 0 - 86400 DS3-EC1-48.EC1-PORT.pmthresholds.line.farend.1day.UAS 10 (seconds) 0 - 86400 DS3-EC1-48.EC1-PORT.pmthresholds.line.nearend.15min.CV 1312 (B2 count) 0 - 137700 DS3-EC1-48.EC1-PORT.pmthresholds.line.nearend.15min.ES 87 (seconds) 0 - 900 DS3-EC1-48.EC1-PORT.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-4 DS3/EC1-48 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain DS3-EC1-48.EC1-PORT.pmthresholds.sts1.nearend.15min.UAS 10 (seconds) 0 - 900 DS3-EC1-48.EC1-PORT.pmthresholds.sts1.nearend.1day.CV 125 (B3 count) 0 - 207360000 DS3-EC1-48.EC1-PORT.pmthresholds.sts1.nearend.1day.ES 100 (seconds) 0 - 86400 DS3-EC1-48.EC1-PORT.pmthresholds.sts1.nearend.1day.FC 40 (count) 0 - 6912 DS3-EC1-48.EC1-PORT.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-5 DS3E Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain DS3E.pmthresholds.cpbitpath.farend.1day.CV 3820 (BIP count) 0 - 27561600 DS3E.pmthresholds.cpbitpath.farend.1day.ES 250 (seconds) 0 - 86400 DS3E.pmthresholds.cpbitpath.farend.1day.SAS 8 (seconds) 0 - 86400 DS3E.pmthresholds.cpbitpath.farend.1day.SES 40 (seconds) 0 - 86400 DS3E.pmthresholds.cpbitpath.farend.1day.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-5 DS3E Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain DS3E.pmthresholds.pbitpath.nearend.1day.UAS 10 (seconds) 0 - 86400 DS3E.pmthresholds.sts.farend.15min.CV 15 (G1 count) 0 - 2160000 DS3E.pmthresholds.sts.farend.15min.ES 12 (seconds) 0 - 900 DS3E.pmthresholds.sts.farend.15min.FC 10 (count) 0 - 72 DS3E.pmthresholds.sts.farend.15min.SES 3 (seconds) 0 - 900 DS3E.pmthresholds.sts.farend.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-6 DS3I Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain DS3I.pmthresholds.cpbitpath.farend.15min.ESCP 25 (seconds) 0 - 900 DS3I.pmthresholds.cpbitpath.farend.15min.SASCP 2 (seconds) 0 - 900 DS3I.pmthresholds.cpbitpath.farend.15min.SESCP 4 (seconds) 0 - 900 DS3I.pmthresholds.cpbitpath.farend.15min.UASCP 10 (seconds) 0 - 900 DS3I.pmthresholds.cpbitpath.farend.1day.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-6 DS3I Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain DS3I.pmthresholds.pbitpath.nearend.1day.UASP 10 (seconds) 0 - 86400 DS3I.pmthresholds.sts.farend.15min.CV 15 (G1 count) 0 - 2160000 DS3I.pmthresholds.sts.farend.15min.ES 12 (seconds) 0 - 900 DS3I.pmthresholds.sts.farend.15min.FC 10 (count) 0 - 72 DS3I.pmthresholds.sts.farend.15min.SES 3 (seconds) 0 - 900 DS3I.pmthresholds.sts.farend.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-7 DS3XM-6 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain DS3XM.pmthresholds.cpbitpath.farend.15min.ES 25 (seconds) 0 - 900 DS3XM.pmthresholds.cpbitpath.farend.15min.SAS 2 (seconds) 0 - 900 DS3XM.pmthresholds.cpbitpath.farend.15min.SES 4 (seconds) 0 - 900 DS3XM.pmthresholds.cpbitpath.farend.15min.UAS 10 (seconds) 0 - 900 DS3XM.pmthresholds.cpbitpath.farend.1day.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-7 DS3XM-6 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain DS3XM.pmthresholds.line.nearend.1day.CV 3865 (BPV count) 0 - 3715200 DS3XM.pmthresholds.line.nearend.1day.ES 250 (seconds) 0 - 86400 DS3XM.pmthresholds.line.nearend.1day.LOSS 10 (seconds) 0 - 86400 DS3XM.pmthresholds.line.nearend.1day.SES 40 (seconds) 0 - 86400 DS3XM.pmthresholds.pbitpath.nearend.15min.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-7 DS3XM-6 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain DS3XM.pmthresholds.vt.farend.15min.CV 15 (BIP8 count) 0 - 2160000 DS3XM.pmthresholds.vt.farend.15min.ES 12 (seconds) 0 - 900 DS3XM.pmthresholds.vt.farend.15min.SES 3 (seconds) 0 - 900 DS3XM.pmthresholds.vt.farend.15min.UAS 10 (seconds) 0 - 900 DS3XM.pmthresholds.vt.farend.1day.CV 125 (BIP8 count) 0 - 207360000 DS3XM.pmthresholds.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-8 DS3XM-12 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain DS3XM12.pmthresholds.cpbitpath.farend.15min.SAS 2 (seconds) 0 - 900 DS3XM12.pmthresholds.cpbitpath.farend.15min.SES 4 (seconds) 0 - 900 DS3XM12.pmthresholds.cpbitpath.farend.15min.UAS 10 (seconds) 0 - 900 DS3XM12.pmthresholds.cpbitpath.farend.1day.AISS 10 (seconds) 0 - 86400 DS3XM12.pmthresholds.cpbitpath.farend.1day.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-8 DS3XM-12 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain DS3XM12.pmthresholds.ds1path.farend.15min.ES 65 (seconds) 0 - 900 DS3XM12.pmthresholds.ds1path.farend.15min.ESA 25 (seconds) 0 - 900 DS3XM12.pmthresholds.ds1path.farend.15min.ESB 25 (seconds) 0 - 900 DS3XM12.pmthresholds.ds1path.farend.15min.SEFS 25 (seconds) 0 - 900 DS3XM12.pmthresholds.ds1path.farend.15min.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-8 DS3XM-12 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain DS3XM12.pmthresholds.line.nearend.1day.SES 40 (seconds) 0 - 86400 DS3XM12.pmthresholds.pbitpath.nearend.15min.AISS 10 (seconds) 0 - 900 DS3XM12.pmthresholds.pbitpath.nearend.15min.CV 382 (BIP count) 0 - 287100 DS3XM12.pmthresholds.pbitpath.nearend.15min.ES 25 (seconds) 0 - 900 DS3XM12.pmthresholds.pbitpath.nearend.15min.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-8 DS3XM-12 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain DS3XM12.pmthresholds.vt.farend.15min.UAS 10 (seconds) 0 - 900 DS3XM12.pmthresholds.vt.farend.1day.CV 125 (BIP8 count) 0 - 207360000 DS3XM12.pmthresholds.vt.farend.1day.ES 100 (seconds) 0 - 86400 DS3XM12.pmthresholds.vt.farend.1day.SES 7 (seconds) 0 - 86400 DS3XM12.pmthresholds.vt.farend.1day.UAS 10 (seconds) 0 - 86400 DS3XM12.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-9 EC1-12 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain EC1.pmthresholds.line.farend.1day.UAS 10 (seconds) 0 - 86400 EC1.pmthresholds.line.nearend.15min.CV 1312 (B2 count) 0 - 137700 EC1.pmthresholds.line.nearend.15min.ES 87 (seconds) 0 - 900 EC1.pmthresholds.line.nearend.15min.FC 10 (count) 0 - 72 EC1.pmthresholds.line.nearend.15min.SES 1 (seconds) 0 - 900 EC1.pmthresholds.line.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-9 EC1-12 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain EC1.pmthresholds.sts1.nearend.1day.PJCDIFF 5760 (count) 0 - 1382400000 EC1.pmthresholds.sts1.nearend.1day.PJCS-PDET 9600 (seconds) 0 - 86400 EC1.pmthresholds.sts1.nearend.1day.PJCS-PGEN 9600 (seconds) 0 - 86400 EC1.pmthresholds.sts1.nearend.1day.PPJC-PDET 5760 (count) 0 - 691200000 EC1.pmthresholds.sts1.nearend.1day.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-10 FC_MR-4 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain FC-MR.config.port.enhancedFibreChannelFicon.IngressIdleFiltering TRUE TRUE, FALSE FC-MR.config.port.enhancedFibreChannelFicon.MaxFrameSize 2148 2148, 2152, 2156, 2160, 2164, 2168, 2172 FC-MR.config.port.MediaType Undefined Fibre Channel - 1 Gbps ISL, Fibre Channel - 2 Gbps ISL, FICON - 1 Gbps ISL, FICON - 2 Gbps ISL, Undefined FC-MR.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card C.2.3.12 OC-3 Card Default Settings Table C-12 lists the OC-3 (OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310) card default settings. Table C-12 OC-3 Card Default Settings Default Name Default Value Default Domain OC3.config.line.AdminSSMIn STU PRS, STU, ST2, TNC, ST3E, ST3, SMC, ST4, DUS, RES OC3.config.line.AINSSoakTime 08:00 (hours:mins) 00:00, 00:15, 00:30 .. 48:00 OC3.config.line.PJStsMon# 0 (STS #) 0-3 OC3.config.line.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-12 OC-3 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain OC3.pmthresholds.line.nearend.1day.SES 4 (seconds) 0 - 86400 OC3.pmthresholds.line.nearend.1day.UAS 10 (seconds) 0 - 86400 OC3.pmthresholds.section.nearend.15min.CV 10000 (B1 count) 0 - 138600 OC3.pmthresholds.section.nearend.15min.ES 500 (seconds) 0 - 900 OC3.pmthresholds.section.nearend.15min.SEFS 500 (seconds) 0 - 900 OC3.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-12 OC-3 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain OC3.pmthresholds.sts3c.nearend.15min.FC 10 (count) 0 - 72 OC3.pmthresholds.sts3c.nearend.15min.NPJC-PDET 60 (count) 0 - 7200000 OC3.pmthresholds.sts3c.nearend.15min.NPJC-PGEN 60 (count) 0 - 7200000 OC3.pmthresholds.sts3c.nearend.15min.PJCDIFF 60 (count) 0 - 14400000 OC3.pmthresholds.sts3c.nearend.15min.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-13 OC3-8 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain OC3-8.config.line.AlsRecoveryPulseInterval 100 (seconds) 60 - 300 OC3-8.config.line.PJStsMon# 0 (STS #) 0-3 OC3-8.config.line.SDBER 1E-7 1E-5, 1E-6, 1E-7, 1E-8, 1E-9 OC3-8.config.line.SendDoNotUse FALSE FALSE when SendDoNotUse TRUE; FALSE, TRUE when SendDoNotUse FALSE OC3-8.config.line.SendDoNotUse FALSE FALSE, TRUE OC3-8.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-13 OC3-8 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain OC3-8.pmthresholds.line.farend.15min.ES 87 (seconds) 0 - 900 OC3-8.pmthresholds.line.farend.15min.FC 10 (count) 0 - 72 OC3-8.pmthresholds.line.farend.15min.SES 1 (seconds) 0 - 900 OC3-8.pmthresholds.line.farend.15min.UAS 3 (seconds) 0 - 900 OC3-8.pmthresholds.line.farend.1day.CV 13120 (B2 count) 0 - 13219200 OC3-8.pmthresholds.line.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-13 OC3-8 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain OC3-8.pmthresholds.sts1.nearend.15min.PJCDIFF 60 (count) 0 - 14400000 OC3-8.pmthresholds.sts1.nearend.15min.PJCS-PDET 100 (seconds) 0 - 900 OC3-8.pmthresholds.sts1.nearend.15min.PJCS-PGEN 100 (seconds) 0 - 900 OC3-8.pmthresholds.sts1.nearend.15min.PPJC-PDET 60 (count) 0 - 7200000 OC3-8.pmthresholds.sts1.nearend.15min.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-13 OC3-8 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain OC3-8.pmthresholds.sts3c.nearend.1day.PJCDIFF 5760 (count) 0 - 1382400000 OC3-8.pmthresholds.sts3c.nearend.1day.PJCS-PDET 9600 (seconds) 0 - 691200000 OC3-8.pmthresholds.sts3c.nearend.1day.PJCS-PGEN 9600 (seconds) 0 - 86400 OC3-8.pmthresholds.sts3c.nearend.1day.PPJC-PDET 5760 (count) 0 - 691200000 OC3-8.pmthresholds.sts3c.nearend.1day.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-14 OC-12 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain OC12.pmthresholds.line.nearend.15min.CV 5315 (B2 count) 0 - 552600 OC12.pmthresholds.line.nearend.15min.ES 87 (seconds) 0 - 900 OC12.pmthresholds.line.nearend.15min.FC 10 (count) 0 - 72 OC12.pmthresholds.line.nearend.15min.PSC 1 (count) 0 - 600 OC12.pmthresholds.line.nearend.15min.PSC-W 1 (count) 0 - 600 OC12.pmthresholds.line.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-14 OC-12 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain OC12.pmthresholds.sts1.nearend.15min.SES 3 (seconds) 0 - 900 OC12.pmthresholds.sts1.nearend.15min.UAS 10 (seconds) 0 - 900 OC12.pmthresholds.sts1.nearend.1day.CV 125 (B3 count) 0 - 207360000 OC12.pmthresholds.sts1.nearend.1day.ES 100 (seconds) 0 - 86400 OC12.pmthresholds.sts1.nearend.1day.FC 40 (count) 0 - 6912 OC12.pmthresholds.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-14 OC-12 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain OC12.pmthresholds.sts12c.nearend.1day.SES 7 (seconds) 0 - 86400 OC12.pmthresholds.sts12c.nearend.1day.UAS 10 (seconds) 0 - 86400 OC12.pmthresholds.sts3c-9c.nearend.15min.CV 25 (B3 count) 0 - 2160000 OC12.pmthresholds.sts3c-9c.nearend.15min.ES 20 (seconds) 0 - 900 OC12.pmthresholds.sts3c-9c.nearend.15min.FC 10 (count) 0 - 72 OC12.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-15 OC12-4 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain OC12-4.config.line.SDBER 1E-7 1E-5, 1E-6, 1E-7, 1E-8, 1E-9 OC12-4.config.line.SendDoNotUse FALSE FALSE when SendDoNotUse TRUE; FALSE, TRUE when SendDoNotUse FALSE OC12-4.config.line.SendDoNotUse FALSE FALSE, TRUE OC12-4.config.line.SFBER 1E-4 1E-3, 1E-4, 1E-5 OC12-4.config.line.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-15 OC12-4 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain OC12-4.pmthresholds.section.nearend.15min.CV 10000 (B1 count) 0 - 553500 OC12-4.pmthresholds.section.nearend.15min.ES 500 (seconds) 0 - 900 OC12-4.pmthresholds.section.nearend.15min.SEFS 500 (seconds) 0 - 900 OC12-4.pmthresholds.section.nearend.15min.SES 500 (seconds) 0 - 900 OC12-4.pmthresholds.section.nearend.1day.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-15 OC12-4 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain OC12-4.pmthresholds.sts12c.nearend.15min.NPJC-PGEN 60 (count) 0 - 7200000 OC12-4.pmthresholds.sts12c.nearend.15min.PJCDIFF 60 (count) 0 - 14400000 OC12-4.pmthresholds.sts12c.nearend.15min.PJCS-PDET 100 (seconds) 0 - 900 OC12-4.pmthresholds.sts12c.nearend.15min.PJCS-PGEN 100 (seconds) 0 - 900 OC12-4.pmthresholds.sts12c.nearend.15min.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-15 OC12-4 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain OC12-4.pmthresholds.sts3c-9c.nearend.1day.NPJC-PGEN 5760 (count) 0 - 691200000 OC12-4.pmthresholds.sts3c-9c.nearend.1day.PJCDIFF 5760 (count) 0 - 1382400000 OC12-4.pmthresholds.sts3c-9c.nearend.1day.PJCS-PDET 9600 (seconds) 0 - 86400 OC12-4.pmthresholds.sts3c-9c.nearend.1day.PJCS-PGEN 9600 (seconds) 0 - 86400 OC12-4.pmthresholds.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-16 OC-48 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain OC48.pmthresholds.line.farend.15min.FC 10 (count) 0 - 72 OC48.pmthresholds.line.farend.15min.SES 1 (seconds) 0 - 900 OC48.pmthresholds.line.farend.15min.UAS 3 (seconds) 0 - 900 OC48.pmthresholds.line.farend.1day.CV 212600 (B2 count) 0 - 212371200 OC48.pmthresholds.line.farend.1day.ES 864 (seconds) 0 - 86400 OC48.pmthresholds.line.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-16 OC-48 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain OC48.pmthresholds.section.nearend.15min.SEFS 500 (seconds) 0 - 900 OC48.pmthresholds.section.nearend.15min.SES 500 (seconds) 0 - 900 OC48.pmthresholds.section.nearend.1day.CV 100000 (B1 count) 0 - 206582400 OC48.pmthresholds.section.nearend.1day.ES 5000 (seconds) 0 - 86400 OC48.pmthresholds.section.nearend.1day.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-16 OC-48 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain OC48.pmthresholds.sts12c-48c.nearend.15min.PJCS-PDET 100 (seconds) 0 - 900 OC48.pmthresholds.sts12c-48c.nearend.15min.PJCS-PGEN 100 (seconds) 0 - 900 OC48.pmthresholds.sts12c-48c.nearend.15min.PPJC-PDET 60 (count) 0 - 7200000 OC48.pmthresholds.sts12c-48c.nearend.15min.PPJC-PGEN 60 (count) 0 - 7200000 OC48.pmthresholds.sts12c-48c.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-16 OC-48 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain OC48.pmthresholds.sts3c-9c.nearend.1day.PJCS-PDET 9600 (seconds) 0 - 86400 OC48.pmthresholds.sts3c-9c.nearend.1day.PJCS-PGEN 9600 (seconds) 0 - 86400 OC48.pmthresholds.sts3c-9c.nearend.1day.PPJC-PDET 5760 (count) 0 - 691200000 OC48.pmthresholds.sts3c-9c.nearend.1day.PPJC-PGEN 5760 (count) 0 - 691200000 OC48.pmthresholds.sts3c-9c.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-17 OC-192 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain OC192.physicalthresholds.alarm.OPR-HIGH 200 (%) OPR-LOW, OPR-LOW + 1.0, OPR-LOW + 2.0 .. 255.0 OC192.physicalthresholds.alarm.OPR-LOW 50 (%) 0.0, 1.0, 2.0 .. OPR-HIGH OC192.physicalthresholds.alarm.OPT-HIGH 120 (%) OPT-LOW, OPT-LOW + 1.0, OPT-LOW + 2.0 .. 255.0 OC192.physicalthresholds.alarm.OPT-LOW 80 (%) 0.0, 1.0, 2.0 ..
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-17 OC-192 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain OC192.pmthresholds.line.nearend.15min.PSC-R 1 (count) 0 - 600 OC192.pmthresholds.line.nearend.15min.PSC-S 1 (count) 0 - 600 OC192.pmthresholds.line.nearend.15min.PSC-W 1 (count) 0 - 600 OC192.pmthresholds.line.nearend.15min.PSD 300 (seconds) 0 - 900 OC192.pmthresholds.line.nearend.15min.PSD-R 300 (seconds) 0 - 900 OC192.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-17 OC-192 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain OC192.pmthresholds.sts1.nearend.15min.PJCS-PDET 100 (seconds) 0 - 900 OC192.pmthresholds.sts1.nearend.15min.PJCS-PGEN 100 (seconds) 0 - 900 OC192.pmthresholds.sts1.nearend.15min.PPJC-PDET 60 (count) 0 - 7200000 OC192.pmthresholds.sts1.nearend.15min.PPJC-PGEN 60 (count) 0 - 7200000 OC192.pmthresholds.sts1.nearend.15min.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-17 OC-192 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain OC192.pmthresholds.sts12c-192c.nearend.1day.PJCS-PDET 9600 (seconds) 0 - 691200000 OC192.pmthresholds.sts12c-192c.nearend.1day.PJCS-PGEN 9600 (seconds) 0 - 86400 OC192.pmthresholds.sts12c-192c.nearend.1day.PPJC-PDET 5760 (count) 0 - 691200000 OC192.pmthresholds.sts12c-192c.nearend.1day.PPJC-PGEN 5760 (count) 0 - 691200000 OC192.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card C.2.3.18 OC192-XFP Default Settings Table C-18 lists the OC192-XFP default settings. Table C-18 OC192-XFP Default Settings Default Name Default Value Default Domain OC192-XFP.config.line.AINSSoakTime 08:00 (hours:mins) 00:00, 00:15, 00:30 .. 48:00 OC192-XFP.config.line.AlsMode Disabled Disabled, Auto Restart, Manual Restart, Manual Restart for Test OC192-XFP.config.line.AlsRecoveryPulseDuration 2.0 (seconds) 2.0, 2.1, 2.2 .. 100.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-18 OC192-XFP Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain OC192-XFP.physicalthresholds.warning.15min.OPT-HIGH 120 (%) OPT-LOW, OPT-LOW + 1.0, OPT-LOW + 2.0 .. 255.0 OC192-XFP.physicalthresholds.warning.15min.OPT-LOW 80 (%) 0.0, 1.0, 2.0 .. OPT-HIGH OC192-XFP.physicalthresholds.warning.1day.LBC-HIGH 200 (%) LBC-LOW, LBC-LOW + 1.0, LBC-LOW + 2.0 .. 255.0 OC192-XFP.physicalthresholds.warning.1day.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-18 OC192-XFP Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain OC192-XFP.pmthresholds.line.nearend.1day.FC 40 (count) 0 - 6912 OC192-XFP.pmthresholds.line.nearend.1day.PSC 5 (count) 0 - 57600 OC192-XFP.pmthresholds.line.nearend.1day.PSC-R 5 (count) 0 - 57600 OC192-XFP.pmthresholds.line.nearend.1day.PSC-S 5 (count) 0 - 57600 OC192-XFP.pmthresholds.line.nearend.1day.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-18 OC192-XFP Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain OC192-XFP.pmthresholds.sts1.nearend.15min.PJCS-PGEN 100 (seconds) 0 - 7200000 OC192-XFP.pmthresholds.sts1.nearend.15min.PPJC-PDET 60 (count) 0 - 7200000 OC192-XFP.pmthresholds.sts1.nearend.15min.PPJC-PGEN 60 (count) 0 - 7200000 OC192-XFP.pmthresholds.sts1.nearend.15min.SES 3 (seconds) 0 - 900 OC192-XFP.pmthresholds.sts1.nearend.15min.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-18 OC192-XFP Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain OC192-XFP.pmthresholds.sts12c-192c.nearend.15min.PPJC-PGEN 60 (count) 0 - 7200000 OC192-XFP.pmthresholds.sts12c-192c.nearend.15min.SES 3 (seconds) 0 - 900 OC192-XFP.pmthresholds.sts12c-192c.nearend.15min.UAS 10 (seconds) 0 - 900 OC192-XFP.pmthresholds.sts12c-192c.nearend.1day.CV 750 (B3 count) 0 - 207360000 OC192-XFP.pmthresholds.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-18 OC192-XFP Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain OC192-XFP.pmthresholds.sts3c-9c.nearend.15min.UAS 10 (seconds) 0 - 900 OC192-XFP.pmthresholds.sts3c-9c.nearend.1day.CV 250 (B3 count) 0 - 207360000 OC192-XFP.pmthresholds.sts3c-9c.nearend.1day.ES 200 (seconds) 0 - 86400 OC192-XFP.pmthresholds.sts3c-9c.nearend.1day.FC 40 (count) 0 - 6912 OC192-XFP.pmthresholds.sts3c-9c.nearend.1day.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-19 MRC-12 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain MRC-12.config.oc12.line.SyncMsgIn TRUE FALSE, TRUE MRC-12.config.oc12.sts.IPPMEnabled FALSE TRUE, FALSE MRC-12.config.oc3.line.AINSSoakTime 08:00 (hours:mins) 00:00, 00:15, 00:30 .. 48:00 MRC-12.config.oc3.line.AlsMode Disabled Disabled, Auto Restart, Manual Restart, Manual Restart for Test MRC-12.config.oc3.line.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-19 MRC-12 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain MRC-12.config.oc48.line.State IS,AINS IS, OOS,DSBLD, OOS,MT, IS,AINS MRC-12.config.oc48.line.SyncMsgIn TRUE FALSE, TRUE MRC-12.config.oc48.sts.IPPMEnabled FALSE TRUE, FALSE MRC-12.physicalthresholds.oc12.alarm.LBC-HIGH 200 (%) LBC-LOW, LBC-LOW + 1.0, LBC-LOW + 2.0 .. 255.0 MRC-12.physicalthresholds.oc12.alarm.LBC-LOW 20 (%) 0.0, 1.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-19 MRC-12 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain MRC-12.physicalthresholds.oc3.warning.15min.LBC-HIGH 200 (%) LBC-LOW, LBC-LOW + 1.0, LBC-LOW + 2.0 .. 255.0 MRC-12.physicalthresholds.oc3.warning.15min.LBC-LOW 20 (%) 0.0, 1.0, 2.0 .. LBC-HIGH MRC-12.physicalthresholds.oc3.warning.15min.OPR-HIGH 200 (%) OPR-LOW, OPR-LOW + 1.0, OPR-LOW + 2.0 .. 255.0 MRC-12.physicalthresholds.oc3.warning.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-19 MRC-12 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain MRC-12.physicalthresholds.oc48.warning.1day.OPR-HIGH 200 (%) OPR-LOW, OPR-LOW + 1.0, OPR-LOW + 2.0 .. 255.0 MRC-12.physicalthresholds.oc48.warning.1day.OPR-LOW 50 (%) 0.0, 1.0, 2.0 .. OPR-HIGH MRC-12.physicalthresholds.oc48.warning.1day.OPT-HIGH 120 (%) OPT-LOW, OPT-LOW + 1.0, OPT-LOW + 2.0 .. 255.0 MRC-12.physicalthresholds.oc48.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-19 MRC-12 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain MRC-12.pmthresholds.oc12.section.nearend.15min.SES 500 (seconds) 0 - 900 MRC-12.pmthresholds.oc12.section.nearend.1day.CV 100000 (B1 count) 0 - 53136000 MRC-12.pmthresholds.oc12.section.nearend.1day.ES 5000 (seconds) 0 - 86400 MRC-12.pmthresholds.oc12.section.nearend.1day.SEFS 5000 (seconds) 0 - 86400 MRC-12.pmthresholds.oc12.section.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-19 MRC-12 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain MRC-12.pmthresholds.oc12.sts1.nearend.1day.PPJC-PGEN 5760 (count) 0 - 691200000 MRC-12.pmthresholds.oc12.sts1.nearend.1day.SES 7 (seconds) 0 - 86400 MRC-12.pmthresholds.oc12.sts1.nearend.1day.UAS 10 (seconds) 0 - 86400 MRC-12.pmthresholds.oc12.sts12c.farend.15min.CV 75 (B3 count) 0 - 2160000 MRC-12.pmthresholds.oc12.sts12c.farend.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-19 MRC-12 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain MRC-12.pmthresholds.oc12.sts12c.nearend.1day.UAS 10 (seconds) 0 - 86400 MRC-12.pmthresholds.oc12.sts3c-9c.farend.15min.CV 25 (B3 count) 0 - 2160000 MRC-12.pmthresholds.oc12.sts3c-9c.farend.15min.ES 20 (seconds) 0 - 900 MRC-12.pmthresholds.oc12.sts3c-9c.farend.15min.FC 10 (count) 0 - 72 MRC-12.pmthresholds.oc12.sts3c-9c.farend.15min.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-19 MRC-12 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain MRC-12.pmthresholds.oc3.line.farend.15min.ES 87 (seconds) 0 - 900 MRC-12.pmthresholds.oc3.line.farend.15min.FC 10 (count) 0 - 72 MRC-12.pmthresholds.oc3.line.farend.15min.SES 1 (seconds) 0 - 900 MRC-12.pmthresholds.oc3.line.farend.15min.UAS 3 (seconds) 0 - 900 MRC-12.pmthresholds.oc3.line.farend.1day.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-19 MRC-12 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain MRC-12.pmthresholds.oc3.sts1.farend.1day.CV 125 (B3 count) 0 - 207360000 MRC-12.pmthresholds.oc3.sts1.farend.1day.ES 100 (seconds) 0 - 86400 MRC-12.pmthresholds.oc3.sts1.farend.1day.FC 40 (count) 0 - 6912 MRC-12.pmthresholds.oc3.sts1.farend.1day.SES 7 (seconds) 0 - 86400 MRC-12.pmthresholds.oc3.sts1.farend.1day.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-19 MRC-12 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain MRC-12.pmthresholds.oc3.sts3c.farend.1day.FC 40 (count) 0 - 6912 MRC-12.pmthresholds.oc3.sts3c.farend.1day.SES 7 (seconds) 0 - 86400 MRC-12.pmthresholds.oc3.sts3c.farend.1day.UAS 10 (seconds) 0 - 86400 MRC-12.pmthresholds.oc3.sts3c.nearend.15min.CV 25 (B3 count) 0 - 2160000 MRC-12.pmthresholds.oc3.sts3c.nearend.15min.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-19 MRC-12 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain MRC-12.pmthresholds.oc48.line.farend.1day.UAS 10 (seconds) 0 - 86400 MRC-12.pmthresholds.oc48.line.nearend.15min.CV 21260 (B2 count) 0 - 2212200 MRC-12.pmthresholds.oc48.line.nearend.15min.ES 87 (seconds) 0 - 900 MRC-12.pmthresholds.oc48.line.nearend.15min.FC 10 (count) 0 - 72 MRC-12.pmthresholds.oc48.line.nearend.15min.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-19 MRC-12 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain MRC-12.pmthresholds.oc48.sts1.farend.15min.ES 12 (seconds) 0 - 900 MRC-12.pmthresholds.oc48.sts1.farend.15min.FC 10 (count) 0 - 72 MRC-12.pmthresholds.oc48.sts1.farend.15min.SES 3 (seconds) 0 - 900 MRC-12.pmthresholds.oc48.sts1.farend.15min.UAS 10 (seconds) 0 - 900 MRC-12.pmthresholds.oc48.sts1.farend.1day.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.2 C.2.3 Defaults by Card Table C-19 MRC-12 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain MRC-12.pmthresholds.oc48.sts12c-48c.farend.15min.SES 3 (seconds) 0 - 900 MRC-12.pmthresholds.oc48.sts12c-48c.farend.15min.UAS 10 (seconds) 0 - 900 MRC-12.pmthresholds.oc48.sts12c-48c.farend.1day.CV 750 (B3 count) 0 - 207360000 MRC-12.pmthresholds.oc48.sts12c-48c.farend.1day.ES 600 (seconds) 0 - 86400 MRC-12.pmthresholds.oc48.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.3 C.3 Node Default Settings Table C-19 MRC-12 Card Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain MRC-12.pmthresholds.oc48.sts3c-9c.farend.1day.CV 250 (B3 count) 0 - 207360000 MRC-12.pmthresholds.oc48.sts3c-9c.farend.1day.ES 200 (seconds) 0 - 86400 MRC-12.pmthresholds.oc48.sts3c-9c.farend.1day.FC 40 (count) 0 - 6912 MRC-12.pmthresholds.oc48.sts3c-9c.farend.1day.SES 7 (seconds) 0 - 86400 MRC-12.pmthresholds.oc48.sts3c-9c.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.3 C.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.3 C.3 Node Default Settings Table C-20 • BITS Timing settings—Set the AIS threshold, Admin SSM, coding, facility type, framing, state, and line build-out (LBO) settings for building integrated timing supply 1 (BITS-1) and BITS2 timing.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.3 C.3 Node Default Settings Table C-20 Node Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain NODE.general.TimeZone (GMT-08:00 ) Pacific Time (US & Canada), Tijuana (For applicable time zones, see Table C-21 on page C-83.) NODE.general.UseDST TRUE TRUE, FALSE NODE.network.general.AlarmMissingBackplaneLAN FALSE TRUE, FALSE NODE.network.general.CtcIpDisplaySuppression FALSE TRUE, FALSE NODE.network.general.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.3 C.3 Node Default Settings Table C-20 Node Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain NODE.osi.tarp.LDB TRUE FALSE, TRUE NODE.osi.tarp.LDBEntry 5 (min) 1 - 10 NODE.osi.tarp.LDBFlush 5 (min) 0 - 1440 NODE.osi.tarp.PDUsL1Propagation TRUE FALSE, TRUE NODE.osi.tarp.PDUsL2Propagation TRUE FALSE, TRUE NODE.osi.tarp.PDUsOrigination TRUE FALSE, TRUE NODE.osi.tarp.T1Timer 15 (sec) 0 - 3600 NODE.osi.tarp.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.3 C.3 Node Default Settings Table C-20 Node Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain NODE.security.dataComm.DefaultTCCEthernetIP 10.0.0.1 IP Address NODE.security.dataComm.DefaultTCCEthernetIPNetmask 24 (bits) 8, 9, 10 .. 32 NODE.security.dataComm.isSecureModeSupportedOnControlCard TRUE FALSE, TRUE NODE.security.dataComm.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.3 C.3 Node Default Settings Table C-20 Node Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain NODE.security.lanAccess.LANAccess (May disconnect CTC from node) Front & Backplane No LAN Access, Front Only, Backplane Only, Front & Backplane NODE.security.lanAccess.RestoreTimeout 5 (minutes) 0 - 60 NODE.security.legalDisclaimer.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.3 C.3 Node Default Settings Table C-20 Node Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain NODE.security.passwordAging.superuser.WarningPeriod 5 (days) 2 - 20 NODE.security.passwordChange.CannotChangeNewPassword FALSE TRUE, FALSE NODE.security.passwordChange.CannotChangeNewPasswordForNDays 20 (days) 20 - 95 NODE.security.passwordChange.NewPasswordMustDifferFromOldByNCharact 1 ers (characters) 1 - 20 NODE.security.passwordChange.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.3 C.3 Node Default Settings Table C-20 Node Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain NODE.timing.bits-1.Framing ESF ESF, D4 when FacilityType DS1; N/A when FacilityType 64kHz+8kHz NODE.timing.bits-1.FramingOut ESF ESF, D4 when FacilityTypeOut DS1; N/A when FacilityTypeOut 6MHz NODE.timing.bits-1.LBO 0-133 0-133, 134-266, 267-399, 400-533, 534-655 NODE.timing.bits-1.State IS IS, OOS,DSBLD NODE.timing.bits-1.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.3 C.3.1 Time Zones Table C-20 Node Default Settings (continued) Default Name Default Value Default Domain NODE.timing.general.QualityOfRES RES=DUS NODE.timing.general.ReversionTime 5.0 (minutes) 0.5, 1.0, 1.5 .. 12.0 NODE.timing.general.Revertive FALSE NODE.timing.general.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.3 C.3.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.3 C.3.
Appendix C Network Element Defaults C.4 C.4 CTC Default Settings Table C-21 Time Zones (continued) Time Zone (GMT +/– Hours) Default Value GMT+12:00 (GMT+12:00) Suva - Fiji GMT+12:45 (GMT+12:45) Chatham Island GMT+13:00 (GMT+13:00) Nuku'alofa - Tonga GMT+13:00 (GMT+13:00) Rawaki, Phoenix Islands GMT+14:00 (GMT+14:00) Line Islands, Kiritimati - Kiribati C.4 CTC Default Settings Table C-22 on page C-86 lists the CTC-level default settings for the Cisco ONS 15454.
INDEX I-Temp Numerics A-8 power requirements 1+1 optical port protection creating linear ADMs description software compatibility 12-19 specifications 7-13 7-6 example shelf configurations by EIA type see also external alarms and controls 7-9 card-level LEDs 1:N electrical card protection description 7-2 3-28 power requirements 7-6 example shelf configurations by EIA type specifications 1-22 7-4 description 15454_MRC-12 card see MRC-12 card location 802.1Q see IEEE 802.
Index modify save BNC 14-10 1-18 LAN connections 14-11 alarms MiniBNC 1-67 1-23 change default severities see alarm profiles timing connections profiles see alarm profiles TL1 craft interface connections traps see SNMP UBIC-H alarm suppressed by user autodelete delete 1-11 1-12 1-64 allocation and routing 14-9 11-27 four-fiber BLSR capacity 14-8 synchronize 12-8 line percentage used by CE-Series Ethernet cards 15-40 14-4 14-4 line percentage used by E-Series Ethernet cards 14-2
Index bandwidth capacity DRI cards 12-8 See also cards indexed individually by name 12-14 fiber connections four-fiber colors in node view 12-12 8-8 common-control card summary 12-5 increasing the traffic speed maximum node number 12-24 12-2 protection channel access circuits preprovision 8-10 replacement 1-72 slot requirements 11-21 1-69 ring switching 12-7 software compatibiity span switching 12-6 symbol and slot correspondence squelch table 2-3 card view 11-22 two-fiber d
Index see also STS see TCC2P card see also VCAT circuits see XC10G card see also VT1.
Index multiple drops D 11-18 secondary sources and drops database service state requirements for drop ports see also TCC2 card see also electrical cards description see also UBIC-H EIA 8-17 MAC address revert 1-13 see also UBIC-V EIA 8-18 card-level LEDs data cards see Ethernet cards description data communications channel see DCC factory defaults datagrams port status 13-4 DCC AIC-I compatibility 2-32 3-9 C-7 3-12 specifications consolidating connections 8-13 8-14 2-32 A-17
Index EIA requirement factory defaults port status specifications 1-14 DS3 CV-L parameter C-4 15-5 DS3i-N-12 card 3-9 slot compatibility specifications A-21 see also electrical cards 3-7 card-level LEDs A-16 DS3/EC1-48 card description 3-20 3-18 see also UBIC-V EIA EIA compatibility see also electrical cards factory defaults see also MiniBNC EIA features see also UBIC-H EIA port status card-level LEDs slot compatibility description 3-17 EIA compatibility factory defaults 1-24
Index factory defaults ported mode LEDs 3-27 portless mode port status description C-25 slot compatibility specifications 3-27, 3-29 compatible GBICs 2-17 XC-VXC-10G card support description see also electrical cards LEDs card-level LEDs port status 3-25 port status 5-13 A-45 see also Ethernet cards C-22 cross-connect compatibility slot compatibility description 3-24 LEDs A-24 traffic mapping 5-13 E100T-12 card 1-14 3-26 specifications 5-13 specifications 1-16 XCVT car
Index cross-connect cards description electrical codes 3-5 electrical interface assemblies see EIA 3-4 EIA compatibility electromagnetic compatibility 1-15, 1-16 EIA requirement definition C-29 performance monitoring specifications 13-14 filter packets for the firewall 15-12 firewall tunnel example 3-6 slot compatibility 1-37 ENE 1-14 factory defaults port status 1-2 GNE load balancing 3-4 13-28 13-18 in a SOCKS proxy server scenario A-15 EIA OSI/IP routing scenarios see also
Index remote monitoring (RMON) GNE in a multivendor OSI network 16-16 Ethernet cards G-Series Ethernet cards equiped with CWDM or DWDM GBICs 5-34 see also CE-1000-4 card integrated BLSR-DRI topology see also CE-100T-8 card manual TARP adjacencies see also E1000-2-G card see also E100T-G card OSI/IP European network see also G1K-4 card Proxy ARP cross-connect card compatibility 2-5 13-5 13-28 roll from one circuit to another circuit at the destination 11-40 5-2 path trace capability 11-24
Index finding F safety and warning information facility data link 15-18 firewall factory defaults seenetwork element defaults external fan-tray air filter see air filter filter packets fan-tray assembly firewall proxy with SNMP description air filter 1-61 tunnel 1-63 fan failure fan speed flange 1-62 13-25 13-28 1-5 front door 6-1 equipment access see also VCAT circuits ground strap applications label 6-7 compatible GBICs 6-8 factory defaults 6-4 FT-TD C-31 13-41 1-2, 1-5
Index gateway connectors per side on routing table description 13-24 Proxy ARP-enabled 1-19 insertion and removal tool 13-2, 13-4 returning MAC address 7-5 1-19 high-density cards 13-4 gateway network element see GNE card protection by EIA type gateway settings card protection description 13-13 GBIC 7-8, 7-11 7-5 see also DS1/E1-56 card overview see also DS3/EC1-48 card 5-31 card compatibility compatible cards see also high-density cards 4-50 CWDM and DWDM description high-dens
Index software and hardware matrix IOS parameter J2 path trace 1-73 JAR files 15-7 IP Java dual IP addresses using secure mode environments networking subnetting see UBIC-H EIA 13-1 to 13-22 JRE 13-2 requirement 13-2 CTC and nodes on same subnet Dual GNEs on a Subnet 8-4 jumper slack storage reels 13-3 1-52 13-3 default gateway on CTC workstation 13-6 K 13-18 IP addressing with secure mode (dual IP addresses) enabled 13-20 K byte 12-3 13-10 Proxy ARP and gateway L 13-4 static
Index link consolidation description icons slot compatibility specifications 8-13 5-25 A-46 ML100T-12 card 8-14 link control protocol see also Ethernet cards 13-30 link-state packet 13-35 cross-connect compatibility LOFC parameter 15-7 description login node groups LEDs 8-11 LOSS-L parameter 5-19 5-20 port status 15-8 5-21 lower backplane cover see backplane covers slot compatibility LSP specifications 13-35 5-21 5-21 A-46 ML100X-8 card see also Ethernet cards M compatibl
Index in virtual OSI routers N 13-42 manually link to TIDs 13-40 NE defaults see network element defaults TARP translation Netscape used by CLNP to identify network devices 8-3 network conversions O C-1 card default tables C-2 OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310-4 card CTC defaults C-86 See also optical cards node defaults C-74 description networks default configuration see path protection LEDs IP networking port status 13-1 to 13-22 13-27 12-1 to 12-21 third party, using server trails timing
Index port status slot compatibility specifications topologies specifications 4-15 4-14 A-29 4-14 OC192/STM64 Any Reach card see OC192-XFP card OC192 IR/STM64 SH 1550 card topologies 4-30 OC192 SR1/STM64 IO Short Reach card see OC192-XFP card OC192-XFP cards See also optical cards See also optical cards See also XFPs description description 4-31 factory defaults LEDs C-50 4-32 port status slot compatibility specifications topologies 4-32 A-37 See also optical cards LEDs C-50 specif
Index factory defaults LEDs C-46 specifications 4-27 port status topologies 4-27 slot compatibility specifications topologies slot compatibility 4-26 A-34 OC48 ELR 200 GHz cards OC48 LR 1550 card See also optical cards LEDs description port status factory defaults LEDs C-46 slot compatibility specifications topologies 4-21 slot compatibility topologies 4-29 4-28 A-35 C-46 4-20 specifications 4-29 port status 4-19 factory defaults See also optical cards 4-27 A-33 4-24 descri
Index OPT-MAX parameter path signal label 15-8 OPT-MIN parameter 15-8 path trace optocoupler isolation 1-56 PCA 11-21 PCM 2-30 OPT parameter 15-8 11-24 11-23 OPWR-AVG parameter 15-8 performance monitoring OPWR-MAX parameter 15-8 DS1/E1 parameters OPWR-MIN parameter 15-14 DS1 and DS1N parameters 15-8 orderwire DS3/EC1-48 parameters description express 15-16 15-27 DS3-12E and DS3N-12E parameters 2-30 DS3 and DS3N parameters 2-30 15-18 local 2-30 DS3i-N-12 parameters 15-
Index monitoring 2-31 specifications supply A-3 15-9 PSD-S parameter 15-10 PST 1-63 PPJC-Pdet parameter PPJC-Pgen parameter B-1 PSTQ 15-4 PPJC-PDET-P parameter B-1 15-8 15-4 PPJC-PGEN-P parameter PPMN PSD-R parameter R 15-8 12-19 rack installation protection switching overview BLSR span switching nonrevertive 1+1 revertive 12-6 7-13 7-4 1-3 Bay Assembly 1-6 multiple nodes 1-5 reversible mounting bracket ring switching 12-7 single node protocols rack size 1-5 1-2 Pr
Index TCC2P port description view security level 2-12 roll SEF-S parameter automatic dual description link icon 11-38 one cross-connection path 15-10 server trails 11-38 11-40 manual 8-8 11-44 8-14 Service Access Point Identifier (SAPI) 11-40 service states 11-38 protected circuits see also administrative states 11-42 restrictions on two-circuit rolls 11-42 card service state location 8-14 single 11-40 card service state transitions status 11-39 cross-connect state transition
Index four-node configuration mounting spacers 12-21 1-12 span upgrades 1-5 12-24 simple network management protocol see SNMP SPE see synchronous payload envelope SMB EIA split fiber routing (VCAT) balun requirement squelch table 1-38 card protection description connectors per side description STS 7-12 VT 7-5 SSH 1-27 DS-3 card requirements SST 16-16 10-3 message types see administrative states 16-4 see circuits, states see service states 16-1 remote network monitoring (RMON)
Index 32-bit EIA/TIA-232 port 13-25 access to nodes fan speed control 13-8 destination host or network interface ports 13-24 superuser LAN port assign superuser privileges to provisioning users change security policies description SW-LCAS 1-68 9-6 2-8 1-67, 8-7 network-level LEDs node database 9-6 1-62 2-9 2-8 power requirements 9-1 A-6 redundant installation process 11-35 synchronization status messaging see SSM reset service disruption synchronous payload envelope slot compat
Index system timing traffic routing 2-12 temperature ranges transmission timers A-8 TCP/IP 13-31 transmux card and OSI mediation TCC2P access see DS3XM-12 card 13-40 DCN communication TDM 13-24 see DS3XM-6 card 13-29 T-TD 2-12 tunnels 11-12 Telcordia Cisco IP tunnels alarm severities DCC tunnels 14-1 performance monitoring standard racks GRE 15-1 temperature ranges 13-43 11-18 IP-over CLNS tunnels Terminal Endpoint Identifier (TEI) twisted pair wire-wrap 13-31 13-43 1-37
Index See also UBIC-H cables sizes UBIC-V cables split routing connector pins description 11-33 supported rates 1-39, 1-51, 1-52 11-35 views 1-39 UBIC-V EIA see card view card protection description connectors per side description see network view 7-12 see node view 7-5 virtual links see provisionable patchcords 1-32 SCSI connectors virtual rings 1-14 shelf assembly compatibility slot designations 12-20 VLAN 1-17 IEEE 802.
Index slot compatibility X 2-24 software compatibility XC10G card specifications bandwidth 11-12 card-level LEDs description temperature range 2-18 functionality VT mapping 2-19 power requirements slot compatibility 1-75 A-6 2-19 software compatibility A-8 2-25 2-3 compatibility by card description 4-51 span length 4-48 specifications 4-49 A-4 A-12 temperature range VT mapping 2-23 XFPs hardware compatibility specifications A-13 STS and VT capacity 2-21 2-3 A-8 2-20 XC